Contents

Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 373
1 of 373

Summary of Content for Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual PDF

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

i

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of valueconscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and quality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owners Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and troublefree motoring. For important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Tollfree: 18003314331

CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Tollfree: 1888TOYOTA8 (18888696828)

Please leave this Owners Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyotas policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

2003 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

ii

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam- age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Important Information About This Manual

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbol shown above, it means: Do not...; Do not do this; or Do not let this happen.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

iii

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited warranties:

New vehicle warranty

Emission control systems warranty

Others

For further information, please refer to the Owners Warranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement.

Your responsibility for maintenance

It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the speci- fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in- formation, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of nongenuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod- ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with nongenuine Toyota products. Modification with nongenuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi- tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Important Information About Your Toyota

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

iv

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Spark ignition system of your Toyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require- ments of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Standard.

Installation of a mobile twoway radio system

As the installation of a mobile twoway radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol- lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau- tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa- tion.

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

SRS airbag system

Seat belt pretensioner system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

Rear height control air suspension

Cruise control system

Antilock brake system

Electronic throttle control system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

v

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten- sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your vehicle.

Onpavement and offroad driving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve- hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for offroad use also. In addition, this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea- ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol- lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure to read Offroad vehicle precau- tions on page 242 in Section 2 and Offroad driving pre- cautions on page 263 in Section 3.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

vi

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Overview of instruments and controls Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 1

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Electric moon roof switch

7. Garage door opener

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. Glove box

10. Automatic transmission selector lever

11. Power door lock switches

12. Power window switches

13. Seat heater switches

14. HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch

15. Rear vents

16. Trash holder

17. Height select switch

18. DAC switch

19. Front cup holders

20. Tilt steering lock release lever

Instrument panel overview

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

3

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

21. Telescopic steering lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch

24. Power rear view mirror control switches

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

4

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Instrument panel light control dial

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog light switches

3. Audio remote control switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Power back window switch

6. Car audio

7. Front passengers seat belt reminder light

8. Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent system indicator light

9. Multiinformation display

10. Emergency flasher switch

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Auxiliary box

13. Back window and rear view mirror defogger switch

14. Fourwheel drive control switch knob (fulltime fourwheel drive models) or multimode control switch knob (multimode fourwheel drive models)

15. Ignition switch

16. Cruise control switch

17. Hood lock release lever

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

5

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

18. Fuel filler door opener

19. TRAC OFF switch

20. Center differential lock switch

21. Power outlet main switch

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

6

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Trip meter reset button

2. Tachometer

3. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Low fuel level warning light

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Odometer and two trip meters

9. Odometer/two trip meter changeover button

Instrument cluster overview

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

7

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

or

Drivers seat belt reminder light1

Low engine oil pressure warning light1

Engine oil replacement reminder light1 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light1

Malfunction indicator lamp1

Discharge warning light1

Antilock brake system warning light1

SRS warning light1

Open door warning light1

Front passengers seat belt reminder light1

Vehicle stability control system warning light1

Traction control system warning light1

(twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system warning light1

(fourwheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system warning light1 (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system warning light1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)

Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent system indicator light

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

8

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Cruise control indicator light5

Center differential lock indicator light3

(fourwheel drive models)

Automatic transmission indicator lights (5speed)

Traction control system off indicator light (twowheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Low speed fourwheel drive indicator light3

(fourwheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Height control OFF indicator light4

Height control indicator lights

1: For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 117 in Section 15.

2: If this light flashes, see Fourwheel drive system on page 141 in Section 16.

3: If this light flashes, see Fourwheel drive system on page 138 and on page 141 in Section 16.

4: If this light flashes, see Rear height control air suspension on page 158 in Section 16.

5: If this light flashes, see Cruise control on page 164 in Section 16.

Headlight high beam indicator light

Automatic transmission indicator lights (4speed)

Fourwheel drive indicator light2

(multimode fourwheel drive models)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

9

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Keys and Doors Keys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobiliser system 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power back window 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 2

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

10

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your vehicle is supplied with the two kinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)These keys work in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will need one of them to make a new key with a builtin transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)This key does not work in the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips are needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

To protect items locked in the glove box when using valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with- out a key, you should always carry a spare key in case you accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans- ponder chip, observe the following precautions:

When starting the engine, do not use the key with a key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the key ring against the key grip. Otherwise the engine may not start, or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

11

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other transponder keys around (including keys of oth- er vehicles) and do not press other key plates against the key grip. Otherwise the engine may not start, or may stop soon after it starts. If this happens, remove the key once and then insert it again after remov- ing other transponder keys (includ- ing keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while gripping or covering them with your hand to start the engine.

Do not bend the key grip.

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off electromagnet- ic waves.

Do not knock the key hard against other objects.

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard and hood under the direct sunlight.

Do not put the key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not use the key with electromag- netic materials.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

12

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Toyota dealer using the key number.

We recommend writing down the key num- ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobiliser system is a theft prevention system. When you in- sert the key in the ignition switch, the transponder chip in the keys head transmits an electronic code to the ve- hicle. The engine will start only when the electronic code in the chip corre- sponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The indicator light will start flashing to show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

The indicator light stays on except when the theft deterrent system is set- ting or activating. (See Theft deterrent system on page 31 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flash- ing when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The indicator light flashes unsteady.

Engine immobiliser system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

13

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Inserting the registered key in the ignition switch automatically cancels the system, which enables the engine to start. The indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a new key with builtin transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and master key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Toyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the sys- tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas- semble the engine immobiliser sys- tem. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI20BTY MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

14

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the key forward. To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and unlock simultaneously with the drivers door. In the drivers door lock, turning the key once will unlock the drivers door and twice in succession will unlock all the side doors and back door simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un- lock all the side doors and back door can be changed to a single key turning opera- tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal- er.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked with a key, the interior light, luggage compartment light, ignition switch light and running board lights (on some models) will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see Interior light on page 105, Luggage compartment light on page 107, Ignition switch light on page 108 and Running board lights on page 108 in Section 14.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward. To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock knobs are in the locked position.

Side doors

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

15

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur. Toyota strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the lock position will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the ve- hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if you leave the key in the ignition switch.

Drivers side

Front passengers side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the front side. To unlock: Push the switch down on the rear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locks or unlocks all the side doors and back door.

If you do either of the following, no side door or back door can be unlocked with the power door lock switch.

Lock all the side doors and back door with the key or wireless remote control transmitter when all the side doors and back door are closed.

Open the drivers door or front passen- gers door and move the inside lock knobs of both front doors to the lock position, then close the front doors.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

16

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The power door lock switch can be reset in the following ways.

Turn the ignition key to ON.

Unlock all the side doors and back door with the key or wireless remote control transmitter.

Unlock the drivers door or front pas- sengers door with the inside lock knob, and then unlock all the doors and back door with the power door lock switch.

This unlocking protection with the power door lock switch can be disabled. For de- tails, contact your Toyota dealer. REAR DOOR CHILDPROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the LOCK position as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a rear door so it can be opened from the outside only, not from inside. We recommend us- ing this feature whenever small children are in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the ve- hicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the ve- hicle during an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

17

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

You can set the following automatic door locking and unlocking functions.

(a) Locking linked with the shift posi- tion

All the side doors and back door are locked automatically when the automatic transmission selector lever is moved out of the P position with the engine running (including ignition switch in the ON posi- tion) and all the side doors and back door are closed. This function is the default setting for new vehicles.

(b) Unlocking linked with the shift posi- tion

All the side doors and back door are un- locked automatically when the automatic transmission selector lever is moved to the P position with the ignition switch in the ON position.

(c) Locking linked with the vehicle speed

All the side doors and back door are locked automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or high- er. However, if any of the side doors and back door is unlocked during driving, this auto locking function will not operate until the unlocked door is opened once.

(d) Unlocking linked with opening the drivers door

All the side doors and back door are un- locked automatically when the drivers door is opened within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from ON to the ACC or LOCK position.

SETTING THE FUNCTIONS

1. Close all the side doors and back door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. Within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position;

To set function (a) Push and hold the front of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the automatic transmission selector lever in the P position.

To set function (b) Push and hold the rear of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the automatic transmission selector lever in the P position.

To set function (c) Push and hold the front of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the automatic transmission selector lever in any position except P.

To set function (d) Push and hold the rear of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the automatic transmission selector lever in any position except P.

All the side doors and back door are auto- matically lock and unlock when you re- lease the power door lock switch. This indicates that the function is set. If all the side doors and back door do not lock and unlock, the time the switch was held may have been too short or too long. Perform the procedure over again starting from step 1.

If you want to cancel a function, repeat the procedure. Each time you perform the procedure, the function is set or can- celled.

Automatic door locking and unlocking functions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

18

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

The wireless remote control system is designed to lock or unlock all the side doors and back door, open the back window or activate the PANIC mode from a distance within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDE DOORS AND BACK DOOR

To lock and unlock all the side doors and back door, push the switches of the transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the LOCK switch. All the side doors and back door are locked si- multaneously. At this time one beep will be heard, and the turn signal lights flash once.

Check to see that all the side doors and back door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or the back door is not securely closed, locking cannot be performed by the LOCK switch and a beep will sound continuously for 10 sec- onds. However, if the key is in the ignition switch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the buzzer, close all the side doors and back door securely or push the UNLOCK switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the UNLOCK switch once to unlock the drivers door alone. Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks all the side doors and back door simultaneously. Each time the UNLOCK switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard, and the turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all the side doors and back door can be changed to a single switch operation. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the UNLOCK switch is pressed, the interior light, luggage compartment light, ignition switch light and running board lights (on some models) will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see Interi- or light on page 105, Luggage compart- ment light on page 107, Ignition switch light on page 108 and Running board lights on page 108 in Section 14.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature. If a door is not opened by then, all the side doors and back door will be automati- cally locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock function can be changed. For details, con- tact your Toyota dealer.

Wireless remote control

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

19

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the LOCK or UNLOCK switch is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera- tion is not repeated. Release the switch and then push again.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the wireless door locking or unlocking function

Cancelling the flash of the turn signal lights

Changing the volume of beep sound

OPENING THE BACK WINDOW

To open the back window, push the back window open switch of the trans- mitter for about 1 second. The window will fully open.

At this time, you can hear a beep.

If the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion, the back window cannot be opened by the back window open switch.

To open the back window with the key, see Power back window on page 26 in this Section.

The back window opening program by wireless remote control can be changed or disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

PANIC SWITCH

Pushing the PANIC switch blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights, and turns on the interior and luggage compartment lights.

The PANIC switch is used to deter ve- hicle theft when you witness anyone at- tempting to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop alarm midway, push any of the switch on the wireless remote control transmitter. You can also stop the alarm by turning the ignition key from LOCK to the ON position.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

20

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The PANIC mode does not work when the ignition key is in the ON position.

This alarm function can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter is an electronic component. Observe the fol- lowing instructions in order not to cause damage to the transmitter.

Do not leave the transmitter on places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.

Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con- trol transmitters for the same vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter does not actuate the doors, back window or alarm, operate from a normal distance:

Check for closeness to a radio trans- mitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

The battery may have been consumed. Check the battery in the transmitter. To replace the battery, see following REPLACING THE BATTERY.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci- dent. (See If you lose your wireless re- mote control transmitter on page 299 in Section 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

21

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec- tion against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc- tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en- couraged to try to correct the interfer- ence by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an- tenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

22

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPLACING THE BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre- vent small children from swallowing the removed transmitter battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter bat- tery, be careful not to lose the com- ponents.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow- ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the transmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat- tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

23

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

3. Put a new transmitter battery with posi- tive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

Make sure the positive side and negative side of the transmitter bat- tery should be faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.

Do not touch or move any compo- nents inside of the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper opera- tion.

Be careful not to bend the electrode of the transmitter battery insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the transmitter case.

Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the transmitter operates properly. If the trans- mitter still does not operate properly, con- tact your Toyota dealer.

The windows can be operated with the switch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, all the power windows work for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when either front door is opened.

The indicator light (AUTO) on the switch tells you the switch can be operated.

Power windows

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

24

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATING THE DRIVERS WINDOW

Use the switch on the drivers door.

Normal operation: The window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch. To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switch completely down or pull it completely up, and then release it. The window will fully open or close. To stop the window part- way, lightly move the switch in the oppo- site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat- ic closing operation or key off closing op- eration, the window stops and opens half way if something gets caught between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the power window may not operate automatically and the jam protection func- tion will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normal- ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switch and lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the window closes and hold the switch for a sec- ond.

Make sure that the window opens and closes automatically. If the power window cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

25

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Window lock switch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passengers door or the switches on the drivers door that control each passengers win- dow.

The window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Push down the switch. To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on the drivers door, the passengers windows cannot be operated.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

26

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power win- dows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someones neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power win- dows, make sure he or she oper- ates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve- hicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervi- sion. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unex- pected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window. Unat- tended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

The back window can be operated with the switch on the instrument panel or the key operation in the back door key- hole.

You can open the back window when the back window wiper is working. At that time, the wiper stops working until the window is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, the back window wiper, washer and defogger will not work. (See Back window wiper and washer on page 110 and Back win- dow and outside rear view mirror defog- gers on page 110 in Section 14.)

Power back window

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

27

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the power back window may not operate automatically and the jam protec- tion function will not function correctly af- ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the power back window with the power back window switch.

To normalize the power back window:

1. Push the (down) switch and lower the window halfway.

2. Push the (up) switch until the win- dow closes and hold the switch for a second.

Make sure that the window opens and closes automatically. If the power back window cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

OPERATING FROM INSIDE

The ignition key must be in the ON posi- tion.

Normal operation: To open or close the back window, quickly push and release the (down) or (up) switch.

Automatic operation: To open or close the back window, push and hold the (down) or (up) switch. The window will fully open or close. To stop the win- dow partway, push the switch on either the (down) or (up) side briefly.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, it works for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function: During automat- ic closing operation or key off closing op- eration, the window stops and opens half way if something gets caught between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

If you push in the window lock switch on the drivers door, the back window cannot be operated.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

28

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The back window can be opened and closed with the key operation in the back door keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully counterclock- wise and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the window begins to open. To stop the window part- way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully clockwise and hold it.

After the door is locked, the window be- gins to close. To stop the window partway, release the key.

This door key linked function can be dis- abled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Jam protection function: During closing operation, the window stops and opens half way if something gets caught between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power back window, always make sure there is nobody around the power back win- dow. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someones neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power back window, make sure he or she operates the window safely.

When small children are in the ve- hicle, never let them use the power back window switch without super- vision. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unex- pected use of the switch.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

29

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power back window switch and get trapped in a window. Unat- tended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Keep the back window closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

To open the back window with the wire- less remote control transmitter, see Wireless remote control on page 18 in this Section.

To open the back door, pull up the back door opener.

The back door can be opened when the vehicle is stopped.

If the back door opener does not operate except when the battery is disconnected or run down, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the back door does not open after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the back door.

To normalize the back door, unlock it with the key, remote control transmitter or pow- er door lock switch, see Side doors on page 14 in this Section.

Make sure that the back door opens. If the back door cannot be opened properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

The back door can be locked or unlocked in the following ways.

All the side doors and back door lock and unlock simultaneously with the back door. Insert the key into the key- hole, turn it clockwise to lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock.

Operate the power door lock switch. (See Side doors on page 14 in this Section.)

Operate the wireless remote control. (See Wireless remote control on page 18 in this Section.)

All the side doors and back door are locked and unlocked simultaneously with the drivers door. (See Side doors on page 14 in this Section.)

If the battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the back door will be auto- matically locked. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.

Back door

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

30

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When all the side doors and back door are unlocked simultaneously with a key, the interior light, luggage compartment light, ignition switch light and running board lights (on some models) will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see Interi- or light on page 105, Luggage compart- ment light on page 107, Ignition switch light on page 108 and Running board lights on page 108 in Section 14.)

The back window can be opened and closed with the key operation in the back door keyhole. (For details, see Power back window on page 26 in this Section.) When closing the back door, the inside

strap can be used to make the reach easier.

To close the back door, lower it and press down on it. After closing the back door, try pulling it up to make sure it is secure- ly closed.

Back door closer: When the back door has not been fully closed, it is automati- cally closed completely.

See Luggage stowage precautions on page 253 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back window and back door closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents ex- haust gases from entering the ve- hicle.

Careful attention is needed so as not to get your fingers trapped as the back door automatically closes when it has not been fully closed.

Never allow a child to operate the back door.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the back door dampers, do not apply any force, paint or let any other foreign matter on them.

Do not apply excessive force when the back door closer is operating. Otherwise, the back door closer may become defective.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

31

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and securely locked. Other- wise, the hood may open unexpected- ly while driving and an accident may occur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks into place. If necessary, press down gently on the front edge to lock it.

To deter vehicle theft, the system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the side doors, back door or hood is forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat- tery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights, and turns on the interior and luggage compartment lights.

Hood Theft deterrent system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

32

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when the key is removed from the ignition switch. (See Engine immobiliser system on page 12 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, back door and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all the side doors, back door and hood are closed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after 30 seconds. When the system is set, the indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light starts flashing, you may leave the ve- hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when you set the system, because unlocking from the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system will cancel under the any of the following conditions:

Any of the side doors, back door or hood is opened.

Any of the side doors or the back door is unlocked.

The key is inserted into the ignition.

The battery terminal is reconnected.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under the following conditions:

If any of the side doors is unlocked or opened without the key or wireless re- mote control transmitter, or if the back door or hood is forcibly opened.

If the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.

If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when the system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the key is not in the ignition switch, all the side doors and back door will relock au- tomatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati- cally stop and the indicator light will starts flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the same circumstances described in Activating the system.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following these ways:

Unlock any of the side doors or the back door with the key or wireless re- mote control transmitter.

Turn the ignition key from the LOCK to ON position.

These ways cancel the system at the same time.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

33

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the battery becomes discharged due to the vehicle being unused for a long time, etc., when the battery is recharged or re- placed, the system will give the alarm. If this happens, immediately unlock any of the side doors or the back door with the key or the wireless remote control trans- mitter, and the alarm will stop.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above. The side doors and back door should be locked with the key or wireless re- mote control transmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator light goes off or starts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside. The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stopping the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood. When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- low open flames when refueling. The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not re- move the cap quickly. In hot weath- er, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly re- moved.

Fuel tank cap

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

34

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap counterclockwise by 90 de- grees (to the pressure point 1), and then turn it an additional 30 degrees (to point 2). Pause slightly before removing it.

Although a click will be heard as you turn the cap to point 1, it does not indicate that the cap can be removed.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right or up and down, and set it in the receptacle on the back side of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear one click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully closed.

If the cap is not installed securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed se- curely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

35

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, ob- serve the following precautions.

Apply force only in the turning di- rection to the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Do not tighten the cap further after you hear one click when installing.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the switch beside the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed by hand.

Sliding operation

To open: Push the switch on the SLIDE OPEN side.

The roof will fully open automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will open while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

The sun shade will be opened together with the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, the deflector will raise to reduce the entering of the strong wind. The angle of the de- flector will be adjusted according to the vehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the TILT UP side.

Electric moon roof

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

36

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The roof will fully close automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will close while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

Tilting operation

To tilt up: Push the switch on the TILT UP side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the SLIDE OPEN side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will tilt down while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, it works for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame during slide clos- ing operation, the moon roof stops and opens half way, and the deflector stops and raises fully.

If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame during tilting down operation, the moon roof stops and opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection func- tion will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normal- ize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the switch on the TILT UP side until the moon roof tilts all the way up and then tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and closes automatically. If the moon roof can- not be operated properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Other- wise, they could be seriously in- jured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someones neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

37

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof switch and get trapped in the roof opening. Unat- tended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

38

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

39

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Seats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and Mirrors Seats 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folddown rear seats 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt steering wheel 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antiglare inside rear view mirror 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto antiglare inside rear view mirror 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear sideview mirrors 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 3

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

40

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve- hicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and prop- erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow passengers to sit on top of a foldeddown seatback, or in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly seated and/or properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

During driving, do not allow pas- sengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 5075 mm (23 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in sever- al ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim- ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, nonslippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air- bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec- ommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Seats

Front seats Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS front airbags)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

41

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury es- pecially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passen- ger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with consid- erable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously in- jured.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the area where the side air- bags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from acti- vating correctly, causing death or serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of front seats equipped with side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side air- bags from activating correctly, dis- able the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, re- sulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Adjustments should not be made while the vehicle is moving, as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

When adjusting the seat, be careful that the seat does not hit a passen- ger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position, re- lease the lever and try sliding the seat forward and backward to make sure it is locked in position.

After adjusting the seatback, push your body back against the seat to make sure the seat is locked in position.

Do not put objects under the seats. Otherwise, the objects may interfere with the seatlock mechanism or unexpectedly push up the seat posi- tion adjusting lever and the seat may suddenly move, causing the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS side airbags) Seat adjustment precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

42

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. Otherwise, your hands or fingers may be caught and injured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull it up. Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING KNOB

To change the angle of the seat cush- ion on the front side, turn the knob either way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER

To change the height of the seat, pull up or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

Adjusting front seats (manual seat)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

43

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maxi- mum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the pas- senger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.

5. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumber support will change while the switch is pushed.

1. DRIVERS SEAT: SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH

PASSENGERS SEAT: SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at that position.

Do not place anything under the front seats, as this might interfere with the seat movement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat- back at that position.

Adjusting front seats (power seat)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

44

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maxi- mum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the pas- senger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumber support will change while the switch is pushed.

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the center of the lever and pull it up. Then slide the seat further forward than the frontmost lock position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le- ver to unlock and push down the seatback.

When returning the seatback upright, be careful not to make yourself hit by the seatback which will bound with consid- erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace the head restraint.

Flattening seatbacks (manual seat)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

45

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat while driving; use the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try pushing the seat and seatback for- ward and rearward to make sure it is secured in place. Be certain to replace head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push the seat position adjusting switch for- ward to slide the seat further for- ward than the frontmost position.

2. Move the seatback angle adjusting switch backward to flatten the seat- back.

After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace the head restraint.

Flattening seatbacks (power seat)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

46

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat while driving; use the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try pushing the seat and seatback for- ward and rearward to make sure it is secured in place. Be certain to replace head restraint.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

Stow the rear center seat belt buckle as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckle from falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckle must be stowed before you fold the seatback.

If you are using a trash holder, lower it.

Folddown rear seats

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

47

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowe- st position.

2. Swing the bottom cushion up by pulling the lock release strap.

If desired, each bottom cushion may be swung up separately.

3. Push the lock release button and fold down the seatback.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment as far as the raised seat cushion. See Luggage stowage precautions on page 253 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

If desired, each seatback may be folded separately.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

48

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK

If you cannot raise the seatback be- cause of the locked seat belt, do not try it forcibly. Release the lock of the seat belt in the following way. Push in the lower front edge of the seatback cushion to slacken the seat belt (1) and let the seat belt retract a little (2).

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original position, observe the following pre- cautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rear- ward on the top of the seatback. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

Make sure the bottom cushion is securely locked by trying to pull up the edge of the cushion near the lock release straps.

Make sure to arrange the buckles of the seat belts in their proper posi- tion and be ready to use.

Front

Rear

Head restraints

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

49

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up. To lower: Push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Front head restraintsYou can also move the head restraint forward or backward. If such adjustment is desired, pull or push the base of the head restraint.

Rear head restraintsWhen an occupant sits on the rear seat, always pull up the rear head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recom- mended.

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head re- straint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head re- straints removed.

To use the armrest, pull it out as shown above.

This armrest is equipped with a cup hold- er and tray. (For details, see Rear cup holders and tray on page 232 in Section 19.)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, move the dial forward (L dial for the left front seat and R dial for the right front seat). At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat heat- er is operating.

Move the dial forward or backward to ad- just to the desired temperature.

To turn it off, move the dial backward until it stops.

When the seat heater is not in use, move the dial fully backward.

The key must be in the ON position to operate seat heaters.

Armrest Seat heaters

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

50

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op- erating the seat heater because it may make them feel too hot or cause burns at low temperatures (erythema, varicella). Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly per- sons, sick persons or handicapped persons

Persons who have delicate skin

Persons who are exhausted

Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blan- ket, cushion, or other insulating ob- jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

Do not put unevenly weighed ob- jects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thin- ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat surface.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the system off when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly re- strained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap- propriate for the child until the child be- comes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belts. See Child restraint on page 73 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicles seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid infla- tion of the airbag may cause death or serious injury to the child.

Seat belts Seat belt precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

51

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not allow the child to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious in- jury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Also do not let the child sit on your lap. It does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju- ry, first check with your doctor for specific recommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe the following:

Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more peopleeven children.

Avoid reclining the seatbacks too much. The seat belts provide maxi- mum protection when the seatbacks are in the upright position. (Refer to the seat adjustment instructions.)

Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or side doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be re- placed. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean- ersthey may severely weaken the belts. (See Cleaning the interior on page 305 in Section 5.)

Replace the belt assembly (includ- ing bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

52

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Adjust the seat as needed (front seats only) and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

When a passengers shoulder belt is com- pletely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This fea- ture is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Section.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder anchor

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up. To lower: Push in the lock release button and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor is locked in position.

Front and rear seat belts

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

53

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a collision.

Take up slack

Too high

Keep as low on hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hipsnot on your waist, then ad- just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

Both highpositioned lap belts and loosefitting belts could cause seri- ous injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.

For your safety, do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

54

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To release the belt, press the bucklere- lease button and allow the belt to re- tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it re- tracts.

The rear center seat belt buckle can be stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckle must be stowed before you fold the seat back. (See Folddown rear seats on page 46 in this Section.)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se- curely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is avail- able from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer so that the dealer can order the proper re- quired length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for prop- er measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Toyota dealer.

Stowing rear center seat belt buckle Seat belt extender

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

55

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender, observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.

Remember that the extender pro- vided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one origi- nally intended. If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the drivers seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt when using the extender in the drivers seat, the SRS drivers air- bag system will judge that the driv- er wears the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the drivers airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

Be sure to wear the seat belt with- out the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passen- ger seat. If installing a child re- straint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

56

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the PRESS signs on the bucklerelease buttons of the ex- tender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on the bucklerelease button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extend- er itself.

When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the seat belt extender is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.

The driver and front passengers seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe fron- tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shock of a severe frontal impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back in by the retractors so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat occupants.

The front seat belt pretensioners are acti- vated even with no passenger in the front seat.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air- bags may not operate together in case of collisions at a certain speeds and angles.

Front seat belt pretensioners

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

57

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the front seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter- connecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 117 in Sec- tion 15.)

The front seat belt pretensioner system mainly consists of the following compo- nents and their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con- trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a saf- ing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the front seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of smokelike gas may be released. This gas is harm- less and does not indicate that a fire is occurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retrac- tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the front seat belt pretensioner as- semblies, airbag sensor or surround- ing area or wiring. Doing so may cause sudden operation of the front seat belt pretensioners or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious inju- ries. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repairs and modifications.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

58

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the front seat belt pretensioners in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile twoway radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor assemblies

Modification of the suspension sys- tem

Modification of the front end struc- ture

Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end

Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or con- sole

This front seat belt pretensioner system has a service reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or the light remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while driving.

If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a mal- function or activation of the relevant front seat belt pretensioner.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the front seat belt pretensioners to op- erate.

Either front seat belt pretensioner as- sembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam- aged.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

59

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) front airbags are designed to pro- vide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the drivers or front passengers head or chest caused by directly hitting the steering wheel or dash- board. The front passenger airbag is acti- vated even with no passenger in the front seat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS front airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Toyota strongly recommends that:

The driver sit as far back as pos- sible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the ve- hicle.

The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.

If the seat belt extender has been connected to the drivers seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt when using the extender in the drivers seat, the SRS drivers air- bag system will judge that the driv- er wears the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the drivers airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

60

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter- connecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 117 in Sec- tion 15.)

The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli- sions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the ve- hicle exceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the de- signed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the ve- hicle is very close to the designed thresh- old level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- volved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, de- ployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

61

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard material

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the under- side of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system mainly consists of the following components, and their loca- tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

4. Drivers seat belt buckle switch

5. Drivers seat position sensor

6. Airbag sensor assembly

7. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with nontox- ic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the drivers vision should it be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with nontoxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can physically and safely exit the vehicle after a collision, you should do so at the first opportunity.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

62

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious inju- ries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more seri- ous injuries, especially if an occupants hands, arms, chest or head are in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. This is why it is important for the occupant to: avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the ve- hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflat- ing airbag.

CAUTION

The SRS airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the prima- ry protection of the driver side and front passenger side seat belt sys- tems. The front seat occupants can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move for- ward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the colli- sion. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wear- ing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions con- cerning the seat belt system, see Seat belts on page 50 in this Sec- tion.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploy- ing front airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all in- fants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and proper- ly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installa- tion of a child restraint system, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Section.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

63

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passen- ger airbag can cause death or seri- ous injury to the child.

Move seat fully back

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger air- bag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys- tem. It is dangerous if the side air- bag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint sys- tem, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Section.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

64

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean over the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front airbags inflate with consider- able speed and force. Otherwise you may be killed or seriously in- jured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.

Do not allow a child to stand up or to kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instruc- tions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Sec- tion.

Do not put objects or your pets on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the front airbag system. They might re- strict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploy- ing airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

65

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not modify or remove any wir- ing. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may cause sudden SRS front airbag inflation or disable the system, which could result in death or seri- ous injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can in- terfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag system in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile twoway radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

Modification of the suspension sys- tem

Modification of the front end struc- ture

Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end

Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, con- sole, steering column, steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag

This SRS front airbag system has a ser- vice reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If either of the fol- lowing conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to ser- vice the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or the light remains on.

The light comes on while driving.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

66

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS front airbags have been in- flated.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard (shaded in the illustra- tion) is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) side airbags and curtain shield air- bags are designed to provide further protection for the driver, front passen- ger and rear outside passengers in addition to the primary safety protec- tion provided by the seat belts.

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

67

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and curtain shield air- bags work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the drivers or front passengers chest and the SRS curtain shield airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the drivers, front passengers or rear outside passengers head. The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag on the passenger side are activated even with no passenger in the front seat or rear seat.

The curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not acti- vated.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable force. To avoid potential death or se- rious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and rear out- side passengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with their back upright and against the seat at all times.

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter- connecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 117 in Sec- tion 15.)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

68

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not inflate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a se- vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

Collision from the front

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists mainly of the fol- lowing components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

4. Curtain shield airbag sensors

5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

6. Airbag sensor assembly

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

69

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as- sembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflat- ors and/or the curtain shield airbag inflat- ors. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with nontoxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This gas is nor- mally harmless; however, for those who have delicate skin, it may cause a minor skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious inju- ries, it may also cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front pillar, and roof side may be hot for sever- al minutes, but the airbags themselves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the prima- ry protection of the driver side, and front and rear outside passenger side seat belt systems. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts. Wearing a seat belt during an acci- dent reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see Seat belts on page 50 in this Section.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly re- strained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For in- structions concerning the installa- tion of a child restraint system, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Section.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

70

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not allow a child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the front door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side from which the side airbag and cur- tain shield airbag deploy even if he/ she is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint sys- tem, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Section. Do not lean against the door when

the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag in- flate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the ve- hicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the front seats with a side airbag, and to the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail with a curtain shield airbag.

Do not get your head closer to the area where the side airbag and cur- tain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags inflate with consider- able speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously in- jured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

71

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not allow a child to kneel on the passenger seat facing the passen- gers side door, since the side air- bag and curtain shield airbag inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or object on or around the door. When the side airbag in- flates, the cup holder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

Do not attach a microphone or any other device or object around the part where the curtain shield airbag activates such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front and side pillars, roof side and assist grips. When the curtain shield air- bag inflates, the microphone or oth- er device or object will be thrown with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate cor- rectly, resulting in death or serious injury.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

72

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate cor- rectly. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook direct- ly.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side air- bags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from acti- vating correctly, causing death or serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of front seats with side airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not disassemble or repair the front pillar and roof side rail con- taining the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable the sys- tem or cause the curtain shield air- bags to inflate accidentally, result- ing in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile twoway radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

Modification of the suspension sys- tem

Modification of the side structure of the passenger compartment

Repairs made on or near the con- sole

This SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system has a service reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or the light remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while driving.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

73

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.

The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam- aged.

The portion of the front pillars and roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems for children small enough to use them.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicles seat belt. See Seat belts on page 50 in this Section for details.

Child restraint Child restraint precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

74

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

For effective protection in automo- bile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an acci- dent, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicles interior.

Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, and is put on the rear seat. Accord- ing to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or serious injury if a rearfacing child restraint system is installed on the front seat.

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger air- bag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys- tem. It is dangerous if the side air- bag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passen- ger seat. If installing a child re- straint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

Make sure that you have complied with all installation instructions pro- vided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

75

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap por- tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturers instructions which accompany the child restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufactur- ers instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer of the system. General directions are also provided under the fol- lowing illustrations.

The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

CAUTION

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or serious injury if a rearfacing child restraint system is installed on the front seat.

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger air- bag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys- tem. It is dangerous if the side air- bag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

After installing the child restraint system, make sure it is secured in place following the manufacturers instructions. If it is not restrained securely, it may cause death or se- rious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from in- juring passengers in the event of a sud- den stop or accident.

Child restraint system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

76

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the childs age and size.

(A) Infant seat (B) Convertible seat (C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se- curing the top strap of a child restraint system.

For instructions about how to use the an- chor bracket, see Using a top strap on page 86 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap- proved for your vehicle may also be used. See Installation with child restraint low- er anchorages on page 88 in this Sec- tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

Types of child restraint system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

77

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rearfacing position only.

CAUTION

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passen- ger airbag can cause death or seri- ous injury to the child.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This can cause death or serious injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden brak- ing or a collision.

If the drivers seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child re- straint system on the rear right seat.

Installation with seat belt

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

78

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufactur- er and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

79

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat secure- ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys- tem in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passen- ger.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

80

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward facing and rearfacing position depend- ing on the childs age and size. When installing, follow the manufacturers in- structions about the applicable childs age and size as well as directions for installing a child restraint system.

CAUTION

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passen- ger airbag can cause death or seri- ous injury to the child.

Move seat fully back

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger air- bag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

81

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys- tem. It is dangerous if the side air- bag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This can cause death or serious injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden brak- ing or a collision.

If the drivers seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child re- straint system on the rear right seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

82

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be ex- tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convert- ible seat securely.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

83

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys- tem in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passen- ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat is used in forwardfac- ing position only.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

84

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Move seat fully back

CAUTION

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger air- bag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys- tem. It is dangerous if the side air- bag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and child fol- lowing the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the childs shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on childs hips. See Seat belts on page 50 in this Section for details.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

85

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder. The belt should be kept away from childs neck, but not falling off childs shoulder. Fail- ure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a col- lision.

Both highpositioned lap belts and loosefitting belts could cause seri- ous injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a childs hips as possible.

For childs safety, do not place the shoulder belt under childs arm.

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not use the child restraint seat until the seat belt is fixed.

2. To remove the child restraint system, press the bucklerelease button and al- low the belt to retract.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

86

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of the anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

Using a top strap

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

87

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Raise the anchor bracket. 3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re- straint system, see Child restraint on page 73 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child re- straint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

88

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Lower the anchor bracket when it is not in use.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear- ance between the seat cushion and seat- back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle. Canada only

Type A

Installation with child restraint lower anchorages

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

89

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connec- tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Type A

1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the low- er anchorages around the tag on the seat cushion.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type B

1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the low- er anchorages around the tag on the seat cushion.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor- ages.

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see Using a top strap on page 86 in this Section.)

For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular ob- jects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This can cause death or serious injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden brak- ing or a collision.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

90

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering wheel, pull the lock release lever toward you, tilt the steer- ing wheel to the desired angle and re- lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi- tion, it will spring up as you release the lock release lever.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishan- dle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up and down to make sure it is locked in position.

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL TILT

To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering wheel, pull the lock release lever toward you, tilt the steer- ing wheel to the desired angle and re- lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi- tion, it will spring up as you release the lock release lever.

Tilt steering wheel Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

91

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN

To change the steering wheel length, push down the lock release lever, set the steering wheel to the desired length and return the lever to its original posi- tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishan- dle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up and down or for- ward and rearward to make sure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mir- ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis- tance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passengers side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than when seen in a flat mirror.

On some models, when you push the back window defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. (See Back win- dow and outside rear view mirror defog- gers on page 110 in Section 14.)

Outside rear view mirrors

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

92

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

On some models, the outside rear view mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear the drivers rear view when it rains. (For details, see Rain clearing mirrors on page 307 in Section 5.)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious inju- ries.

On some models, since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the defogger switch is on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switchTo select the mirror to be adjusted Push the switch to L (left) or R (right).

2. Control switchTo move the mir- ror P ush the switch in the desired direction.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is in the ACC or ON position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mir- ror face. Use a spray deicer to free the mirror.

Power rear view mirror control

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

93

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back- ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and pas- senger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mir- ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you during night driving, operate the lever on the lower edge of the mirror.

Daylight drivingLever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater clarity at this position.

Night drivingLever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the ve- hicle and an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Folding rear view mirrors Antiglare inside rear view mirror

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

94

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mir- ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti glare function. The function is designed to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you during night driving.

When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view mirror al- ways turns on in the automatic function mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you that the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.

To turn off the automatic function, push the MIRROR switch.

To turn on the automatic function again, push the MIRROR switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it may take little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the ve- hicle and an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of an antiglare mirror sensor located on the back side of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensor with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.

Auto antiglare inside rear view mirror

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

95

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Rear sideview mirrors are useful as a secondary means of checking the area to the rear of the vehicle.

Carefully check the area to the rear of the vehicle by either looking directly or using both outside and inside rear view mirrors.

Type A

Type B

Rear sideview mirrors Sun visors

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

96

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the frontSwing down the main sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the sideSwing down the main sun visor, remove it from the hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).

Type AIf glare comes from obliquely be- hind you, extend the plate at the end of the visor (to position 3).

Type BIf glare comes from obliquely be- hind you, slide the main sun visor back- ward (to position 3).

To block the glare from the front when the main sun visor is swung to the lateral side, swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

Type ADo not extend the plate at the end of the sun visor when the visor is in the position 1. It can cover the antiglare inside rear view mirror and obstruct the rear view.

Type BSlide the main sun visor only when it is swung down to the lateral side. It can cover the anti glare inside rear view mirror and obstruct the rear view.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

97

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type A

Type B

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down the main sun visor and slide the cover.

Type A

The vanity light comes on when you slide the cover.

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed for 30 minutes or more.

Vanity mirrors

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

98

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

99

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Lights, Wipers and Defogger Headlights and turn signals 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running board lights 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window wiper and washer 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 110. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 4

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

100

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2Headlights and all of the above

Position 3 (AUTO)Headlights and/or all of the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend- ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2 to turn on the headlights if they are need- ed immediately when entering a dark tun- nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the drivers side instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.

The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the tail lights on

The lights automatically turn off when the drivers door is opened with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on

The lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all the side doors and back door are closed with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

If the LOCK switch of the wireless re- mote control transmitter is pushed twice simultaneously, the lights automatically turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the drivers door is kept opened, the lights automatically turn off after 30 min- utes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the ON position or actuate the headlight switch.

If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the lights on for a long period when the engine is not running.

Headlights and turn signals (with automatic light control system)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

101

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all models sold in Canada and some mod- els sold in U.S.A.)

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The DRL system can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be espe- cially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run- ning.

The knob is in the OFF position, position 1 or position 3 with the tail lights on.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob to the position 2 or position 3 with the headlights on, or turn the ignition switch off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

HighLow beamsFor high beams, turn the headlights on and push the lever away from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light (blue light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights (position 3)Pull the lever all the way back. The high beam headlights turn off when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights with the knob turned to OFF.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/ turn signal lever up or down to position 1.

The key must be in the ON position.

The lever automatically returns after you make a turn, but you may have to return it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the pressure point (position 2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal lights are on during daytime running light system is on. For details, see Daytime running light system.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

102

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green lights) on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, a front or rear turn signal bulb is burned out.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2Headlights and all of the above

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1

The lights automatically turn off when the drivers door is opened with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

Position 2

The lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all the side doors and back door are closed with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

If the LOCK switch of the wireless re- mote control transmitter is pushed twice simultaneously, the lights automatically turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the drivers door is kept opened, the lights automatically turn off after 30 min- utes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the ON position or actuate the headlight switch.

If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the lights on for a long period when the engine is not running.

Headlights and turn signals (without automatic light control system)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

103

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all models sold in Canada and some mod- els sold in U.S.A.)

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The DRL system can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be espe- cially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run- ning.

The knob is in the OFF position or position 1.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob to the position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

HighLow beamsFor high beams, turn the headlights on and push the lever away from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light (blue light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights (position 3)Pull the lever all the way back. The high beam headlights turn off when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights with the knob turned to OFF.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/ turn signal lever up or down to position 1.

The key must be in the ON position.

The lever automatically returns after you make a turn, but you may have to return it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the pressure point (position 2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal lights are on during daytime running light system is on. For details, see Daytime running light system.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

104

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green lights) on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, a front or rear turn signal bulb is burned out.

To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if your vehicle must be stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos- sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are operat- ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the en- gine is not running.

Emergency flashers

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

105

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To adjust the brightness of the instru- ment panel lights, turn the dial.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist the band of the headlight and turn sig- nal switch lever. They will come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

Without rear seat audio system

With rear seat audio system

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights Interior light

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

106

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.

The interior light switch has the following positions:

ONKeeps the light on all the time.

OFFTurns the light off.

DOORTurns the light on when any of the side doors and back door is opened. The light goes off when all the side doors and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position and any of the side doors and back door is opened, the light will come on. After all the side doors and back door are closed, the light re- mains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position, and the ignition switch is turned to LOCK, the light will come on. The light remains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the lights will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened with the switch at DOOR position for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the personal lights, push the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens once again.

Personal lights

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

107

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To turn on the luggage compartment light, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch has the following positions:

ONKeeps the light on all the time.

OFFTurns the light off.

DOORTurns the light on when any of the side doors and back door is opened. The light goes off when all the side doors and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position and any of the side doors and back door is opened, the light will come on. After all the side doors and back door are closed, the light re- mains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position, and the ignition switch is turned to LOCK, the light will come on. The light remains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the lights will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened with the switch at DOOR position for 30 minutes or more.

Luggage compartment light

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

108

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when any of the side doors and back door is opened or when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.

The light remains on for about 15 seconds after all the side doors and back door are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened for 30 minutes or more.

Lighting the running boards and the ground helps you easily to get in and out of the vehicle in the night. The lights come on when any of the side doors is opened.

The lights remain on for about 15 seconds after all the side doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light go off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5 mph) or higher.

Ignition switch light Running board lights

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

109

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the lights will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the ON position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The INT TIME band lets you adjust the wiping time interval when the wiper lever is in the intermittent position (position 1). Twist the band upward to increase the time between sweeps, and downward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever toward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid, see Adding washer fluid on page 343 in Section 73.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield, which can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind- shield is dry. It may scratch the glass.

Windshield wipers and washer

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

110

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To turn on the back window wiper, twist the lever knob upward.

The key must be in the ON position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window, twist the knob upward or downward as far as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob automatically returns from these positions after you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid, see Adding washer fluid on page 343 in Section 73.

If the back window is not fully closed, the back window wiper and washer will not work. Make sure the back window is fully closed when using the back window wiper and washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip- er if the back window is dry. It may scratch the glass.

To defog or defrost the back window, push the switch with the back window closed.

The key must be in the ON position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the back window will quickly clear the surface. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the defogger is operating.

On some models, heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will also quickly clear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn the defoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af- ter the defoggers have operated about 15 minutes.

Back window wiper and washer

Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

111

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the back window is not fully closed, the back window defogger will not work. Make sure the back window is fully closed when using the back window defogger.

If the back window is opened while the defogger is working, the defogger will au- tomatically turn off. Even if the back win- dow is fully closed after that, the defogger will not automatically turn on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the defoggers on for a long time could cause the battery to discharge, especially during stopandgo driving. The defoggers are not designed for drying rain water or for melting snow.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connec- tors.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

112

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

113

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators Fuel gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 5

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

114

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Low fuel level warning light

The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of the fuel remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly fullNeedle at F Nearly emptyNeedle at E

It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler- ating or making turns. This is caused by the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches E or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move- ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle of the fuel gauge returns to E when the ignition switch is turned to the START position.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone, your engine is too hot. If your vehicle overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.

Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

115

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stopandgo traffic.

Towing a trailer.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge returns to C when the ignition switch is turned to the START position.

NOTICE

Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to con- trol the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See If your ve- hicle overheats on page 282 in Section 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to select correct shift points and to prevent en- gine lugging and overrevving.

Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle of the tachometer returns to the bottom position when the ignition switch is turned to the START position.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage.

Tachometer

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

116

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters.

1. OdometerShows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip metersShow two different distances independently driven since the last time each trip meter was set to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip. All trip meter data is cancelled if the elec- trical power source is disconnected.

3. Odometer/two trip meter changeover buttonSwitches the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly push and release the changeover but- ton. The meter display changes in the order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B, then back to the odometer each time you push.

4. Trip meter reset buttonResets the two trip meters to zero.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis- play the meter A reading, then push and hold the button until the meter is set to zero. The same process can be applied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

117

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) (indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b) (indicator and buzzer)

Fasten drivers seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passengers seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

118

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) Replace engine oil.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors and back door.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

119

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(n) Add washer fluid.

(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

120

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key is in the ON posi- tion.

When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the ON position on even after the parking brake is released.

When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low.

When the hydraulic brake booster fails...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer in the following cases:

The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the igni- tion key is in the ON position.

The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned on with the park- ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc- curs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running.

The warning buzzer comes on to- gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will be- come longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.

The brake system warning light re- mains on together with the ABS warning light.

In this case, not only the antilock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely un- stable during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc- cur, but do not indicate the malfunc- tion:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

121

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(b) Drivers Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the drivers seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the reminder light flashes and buzzer come on if the drivers seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light keeps on flashing and the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se- conds.

(c) Front Passengers Seat Belt Reminder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up the front passengers seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Howev- er, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the light may not flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, builtin sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to come on.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is being discharged.

If it comes on while you are driving, there is a problem somewhere in the charging system.

The engine ignition will continue to oper- ate, however, until the battery is dis- charged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres- sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light oneven for one block. It may ruin the engine.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

122

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the followings.

Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi- ately.

Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp will not go off even after the several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, elec- tronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warn- ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- er, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to ACC or LOCK position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro- neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Toyota dealer to check your vehicles emission control system and OBD (OnBoard Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs on page 314 in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move- ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

(h) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light reminds you when to replace the engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to ON and will go off after about a few seconds.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

123

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When you drive for about 8000 km (5000 miles) after the engine oil replacement, this light illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds with the ignition key turned to ON posi- tion. If you continue driving without the engine oil replacement, and if the driving range exceeds 12000 km (7500 miles), the light will come on after the ignition key is turned to ON position. The light will re- main on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that you replace the engine oil at an early opportunity depending on the driving and road condition. If the light comes on, re- place it as soon as possible.

You need to reset the light after the en- gine oil replacement. Reset the light by following the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- tion with the odometer reading shown. (For details, see Odometer and two trip meters on page 116 in this Sec- tion.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi- tion while holding down the trip meter reset button.

Hold down the button until the light goes off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and illuminates for 1 second.

If the system fails to reset, the light will remain flashing.

(i) ABS Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. If the anti lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the following systems do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

Antilock brake system

Brake assist system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the antilock brake system does not operate, so that the wheels will lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc- curs, this indicates a malfunction some- where in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri- ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

124

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

If the ABS warning light remains on together with the brake system warn- ing light, immediately stop your ve- hicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the antilock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unsta- ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- tion:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

(j) VSC TRAC Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

The light will come on when the ignition key turned to ON, and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

There is no problem when the VSC TRAC warning light comes on when the brake actuator temperature becomes high.

If the light comes on while driving, the above mentioned systems do not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to con- tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The TRAC OFF indicator light will come on when the VSC TRAC warning light comes on even if the TRAC OFF switch is not pushed.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the side doors and back door are completely closed.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

125

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(l) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. After about 6 seconds, the light will go off. This means the system of the air- bag and front seat belt pretensioner are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, inter- connecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion or remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while driving.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans- mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv- ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put the selector lever in P. With the engine id- ling, wait until the light goes off. If the light goes off, you may start the vehicle again. If the light does not go off, call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warning light on may damage the automatic transmission.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light (for vehicles sold in Canada)

The light warns that the windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at your earliest opportunity. (For instructions, see Adding washer fluid on page 343 in Section 73.)

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the drivers door with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

126

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (except the low fuel level warning light and low windshield washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or back door. The open door warning light should come on.

3. Close the door. The open door warning light should go off.

4. Turn the ignition key to ON, but do not start the engine. All the service reminder indicators ex- cept the open door warning light should come on.

The following service reminder indica- tors go off after a few seconds:

Engine oil replacement reminder light

ABS warning light

VSC TRAC warning light

TRAC OFF indicator light (twowheel drive models)

VSC OFF indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Height control indicator lights

Height control OFF indicator light

Downhill assist control system indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

The SRS warning light goes off after about 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the ABS warning light (brake assist system warning light), VSC TRAC warning light and TRAC OFF (twowheel drive models) or VSC OFF (fourwheel drive models) indicator light stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn- ing buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

127

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake Ignition switch with steering lock 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fourwheel drive system 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active traction control system 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downhill assist control system 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hillstart assist control system 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear height control air suspension 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 6

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

128

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

STARTStarter motor on. The key will return to the ON position when released.

For starting tips, see page 259 in Section 3.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle of the tachometer, fuel gauge or engine coolant temperature gauge returns to the bottom position when the ignition switch is turned to the START position.

ONEngine on and all accessories on.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle on the speedometer may move when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- tion.

ACCAccessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the ACC or LOCK position and open the drivers door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.

LOCKEngine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The key can be re- moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from ACC to the LOCK position. The selec- tor lever must be in the P position be- fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im- mobiliser system is automatically set. (See Engine immobiliser system on page 12 in Section 12.)

When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the LOCK position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the ON position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the ignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steering lock

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

129

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of P position when the brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition switch in ON position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (5speed)

With the brake pedal depressed (The ignition switch must be in ON position.)

Shift normally.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

130

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in How to start the engine on page 260 in Section 3. The transmission must be in P or N.

When the fourwheel drive control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, center differential locked), the driving pattern se- lector setting has no effect on gear shift timing. (See Fourwheel drive system (fulltime fourwheel drive models) on page 138 in this Section for information of the fourwheel drive control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to D.

When the lever is in the D position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for running condi- tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the D position for better fuel economy and quieter driving. If the engine coolant temperature is low or when the fourwheel drive control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, center differential locked), the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the D posi- tion. (See Fourwheel drive system (full time fourwheel drive models) on page 138 in this Section for information of the fourwheel drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera- tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked with the shift position is set, all the side doors and back door are automatically locked when the shift lever is moved out of the P position with the engine running (including ignition switch in the ON posi- tion) and all the side doors and back door are closed. For details, see Automatic door locking and unlocking functions on page 17 in Section 12.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift the transmission as follows:

Shift into the 4 position. The trans- mission will downshift to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the 3 position. The trans- mission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models 133 km/h (83 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

133 km/h (83 mph)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

52 km/h (32 mph)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

131

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Shift into the 2 position. The trans- mission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models 90 km/h (56 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

90 km/h (56 mph)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

35 km/h (22 mph)

Shift into the L position. The trans- mission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and maximum engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models 47 km/h (29 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

47 km/h (29 mph)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

18 km/h (11 mph)

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from D to 4, engine braking will not be enabled be- cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see Cruise control on page 164 in this Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. Abrupt shifting could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.

(d) Using 3, 2 and L positions

The 3, 2 and L positions are used for strong engine braking as described pre- viously.

With the selector lever in 3, 2 or L, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in D.

With the selector lever in 3 or 2, the vehicle will start in first gear and automat- ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in L, the trans- mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

Be careful not to overrev the en- gine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum al- lowable speed for each position is given below for your reference:

Twowheel drive models 3 136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . 2 93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . L 54 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . .

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

132

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Fourwheel drive models

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

3 136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . 2 93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . L 54 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . .

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

3 53 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . 2 36 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . L 21 km/h (13 mph). . . . . . . .

Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the 3, 2 or L position. This may cause severe automatic transmis- sion damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, 4 position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the R position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve- hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down, fully depress the parking brake pedal to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down, shift the selector lever to the P posi- tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector lever into P position under any cir- cumstances while the vehicle is mov- ing. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked with the shift position is set, all the side doors and back door are automatically un- locked when the selector lever is moved to the P position with the ignition switch is in the ON position. For details, see Automatic door locking and unlocking functions on page 17 in Section 12.

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between fourth gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the 4 posi- tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the D position immediately after- ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main- tain engine braking efficiency, do not use D position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

133

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator ped- al, as this can cause the transmission to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le- ver out of P position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from the P position even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever on page 298 in Section 4.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

134

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of P position when the brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition switch in ON position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

3: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (4speed)

With the brake pedal depressed (The ignition switch must be in ON position.)

Shift normally.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

135

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in How to start the engine on page 260 in Section 3. The transmission must be in P or N.

When the multimode control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked), the driv- ing pattern selector setting has no effect on gear shift timing. (See Fourwheel drive system (multimode fourwheel drive models) on page 141 in this Section for information of the multimode control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to D.

When the lever is in the D position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for running condi- tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the D position for better fuel economy and quieter driving. If the engine coolant temperature is low or when the multimode control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked), the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the D position. (See Fourwheel drive system (multimode fourwheel drive mod- els) on page 141 in this Section for in- formation of the multimode control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera- tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked with the shift position is set, all the side doors and back door are automatically locked when the shift lever is moved out of the P position with the engine running (including ignition switch in the ON posi- tion) and all the side doors and back door are closed. For details, see Automatic door locking and unlocking functions on page 17 in Section 12.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift the transmission as follows:

Shift into the 3 position. The trans- mission will downshift to third gear.

Shift into the 2 position. The trans- mission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models 123 km/h (76 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

Multimode control switch knob at H4

123 km/h (76 mph)

Multimode control switch knob at L4

41 km/h (25 mph)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

136

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Shift into the L position. The trans- mission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and maximum engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models 59 km/h (36 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

Multimode control switch knob at H4

59 km/h (36 mph)

Multimode control switch knob at L4

11 km/h (6 mph)

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from D to 3, engine braking will not be enabled be- cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see Cruise control on page 164 in this Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. Abrupt shifting could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.

(d) Using 2 and L positions

The 2 and L positions are used for strong engine braking as described pre- viously.

With the selector lever in 2 or L, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in D.

With the selector lever in 2, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to second gear.

With the selector lever in L, the trans- mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

Be careful not to overrev the en- gine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum al- lowable speed for each position is given below for your reference:

Twowheel drive models 2 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . L 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . .

Fourwheel drive models

Multimode control switch knob at H2 or H4

2 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . L 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . .

Multimode control switch knob at L4

2 48 km/h (29 mph). . . . . . . . L 26 km/h (16 mph). . . . . . . .

Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the 2 or L position. This may cause severe automatic transmission dam- age from overheating. To prevent such damage, D or 3 position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

137

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the R position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve- hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down, fully depress the parking brake pedal to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down, shift the selector lever to the P posi- tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector lever into P position under any cir- cumstances while the vehicle is mov- ing. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked with the shift position is set, all the side doors and back door are automatically un- locked when the selector lever is moved to the P position with the ignition switch is in the ON position. For details, see Automatic door locking and unlocking functions on page 17 in Section 12.

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between third gear and over- drive when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the 3 posi- tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the D position immediately after- ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main- tain engine braking efficiency, do not use D position. The selector lever must be in the 3 position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator ped- al, as this can cause the transmission to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le- ver out of P position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from the P position even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever on page 298 in Section 4.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

138

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the fourwheel drive control switch knob and center differential lock switch to select the transfer and center differ- ential modes.

The H4 and L4 positions of the four wheel drive control switch knob provide either lock or unlock mode of the center differential depending on the center differ- ential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface. When the center differential is locked, the vehicle stability control system is automatically turned off and the center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator lights come on because the function that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock switch is turned on, the VSC OFF indicator light comes on. After the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery or bumpy surface, turn the center differential lock switch off. Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light and vehicle stabil- ity control system off indicator light turn off.

H4 (high speed position, center differ- ential unlocked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4, center differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on all types of roads, from dry hardsurfaced roads to wet, icy or snowcovered roads. This position gives greater economy, quietest ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

H4 (high speed position, center differ- ential locked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4, center differential lock switch pushed in

Use this for greater traction when you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping, in the center differential unlock mode.

Fourwheel drive system (fulltime fourwheel drive models) (a) Fourwheel drive control

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

139

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

L4 (low speed position, center differ- ential unlocked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4, center differential lock switch left out

The 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light comes on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for climbing or descending steep hills, offroad driving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc- curs when the wheels are negotiating a sharp corner is further reduced than in the L4 (low position, center differential locked) mode.

L4 (low speed position, center differ- ential locked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4, center differential lock switch pushed in

The 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light comes on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for hard pulling in situations the vehicle cannot negotiate even in the L4 (low speed position, center differential un- locked) mode. Also, using this mode when driving down steep offroad inclines will help contribute to increased vehicle stabil- ity.

The indicator light tells when the differen- tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ- ential is not still locked as long as the indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the indicator blinks. If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the center differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op- eration is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise control system is set, cancel the cruise control system. To can- cel the cruise control system, see Cruise control on page 164 in Section 16.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the center differential lock system.

See (b) Shifting procedure for further in- structions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in L4 (low speed position) mode

If the fourwheel drive control switch knob is in the L4 and the automatic transmis- sion selector lever is in the 2 or 3 when you drive in steep offroad areas, the output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the active traction control system, which assists the driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.

Use the L position of the automatic transmission selector lever for maximum power and traction when your wheels get stuck or when you drive down a steep incline. In the following cases, the output of the brake can be controlled by the active traction control system if the engine speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels get unstuck).

The fourwheel drive control switch knob in the L4 position and the auto- matic transmission selector lever in the L position

The fourwheel drive control switch knob in the L4 position and the auto- matic transmission selector lever in the D, 4, 3 or 2 with the transmis- sion downshifting to first gear

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

140

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The fourwheel drive control switch knob in the L4 position and the auto- matic transmission selector lever in the R position

(As for the automatic transmission selec- tor lever positions, see Automatic trans- mission (5speed) on page 129 in this Section.)

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 (UNLOCKED) AND H4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in H4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN L4 (UNLOCKED) AND L4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in L4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 AND L4

To shift from H4 to L4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and push and turn the fourwheel drive control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from L4 to H4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and turn the fourwheel drive control switch knob fully counterclockwise.

If the 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light continues to blink when you operate the fourwheel drive control switch knob to the H4 or L4 position, drive forward or backward in a short dis- tance, then stop the vehicle completely, shift the automatic transmission selector lever securely into N and operate the switch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the fourwheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the fourwheel drive control switch knob if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spin- ning before operating.

(b) Shifting procedure

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

141

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Multimode control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the multimode control switch knob and center differential lock switch to select the transfer and center differ- ential modes.

The H4 and L4 positions of the multi mode control switch knob provide either lock or unlock mode of the center differen- tial depending on the center differential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface. When the center differential is locked, the vehicle stability control system is automatically turned off and the center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator lights come on because the function that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock switch is turned on, the VSC OFF indicator light comes on. After the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery or bumpy surface, turn the center differential lock switch off. Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light and vehicle stabil- ity control system off indicator light turn off.

Fourwheel drive system (multimode fourwheel drive models) (a) Multimode control

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

142

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

H2 (high speed position, twowheel drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- timode control switch knob at H2, cen- ter differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on dry hard surfaced roads. This position gives greater economy, quietest ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

H4 (high speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- timode control switch knob at H4, cen- ter differential lock switch left out

The fourwheel drive indicator light comes on when the H4 mode is selected.

Use this for normal driving on all types of roads, from dry hardsurfaced roads to wet, icy or snowcovered roads. This position provides greater traction than twowheel drive.

H4 (high speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked): Multi mode control switch knob at H4, center differential lock switch pushed in

The fourwheel drive indicator light comes on when the H4 mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction when you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping, in the center differential unlock mode.

L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- timode control switch knob at L4, cen- ter differential lock switch left out

The fourwheel drive and 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator lights come on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for climbing or descending steep hills, offroad driving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc- curs when the wheels are negotiating a sharp corner is further reduced than in the L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked) mode.

L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked): Multi mode control switch knob at L4, center differential lock switch pushed in

The fourwheel drive and 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator lights come on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for hard pulling in situations the vehicle cannot negotiate even in the L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, cen- ter differential unlocked) mode. Also, using this mode when driving down steep off road inclines will help contribute to in- creased vehicle stability.

The indicator light tells when the differen- tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ- ential is not still locked as long as the indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the indicator blinks. If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the center differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op- eration is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise control system is set, cancel the cruise control system. To can- cel the cruise control system, see Cruise control on page 164 in Section 16.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the center differential lock system.

See (c) Shifting procedure for further in- structions.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

143

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Advice for driving on slippery roads in L4 (low speed position) mode

If the multimode control switch knob is in the L4 and the automatic transmission selector lever is in the 2 when you drive in steep offroad areas, the output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the active traction control system, which as- sists the driver to control the driving pow- er of 4 wheels.

Use the L position of the automatic transmission selector lever for maximum power and traction when your wheels get stuck or when you drive down a steep incline. In the following cases, the output of the brake can be controlled by the active traction control system if the engine speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels get unstuck).

The multimode control switch knob in the L4 position and the automatic transmission selector lever in the L position

The multimode control switch knob in the L4 position and the automatic transmission selector lever in the D, 3 or 2 with the transmission down- shifting to first gear

The multimode control switch knob in the L4 position and the automatic transmission selector lever in the R position

(As for the automatic transmission selec- tor lever positions, see Automatic trans- mission (4speed) on page 134 in this Section.)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen- gaged by the shifting operations de- scribed in (c) Shifting procedure.

You should drive in fourwheel drive for at least 16 km (10 miles) each month. This will assure that the front drive com- ponents are lubricated.

(b) A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting differential)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

144

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SHIFTING BETWEEN H2 AND H4 (UNLOCKED)

To shift from H2 to H4 (unlocked), reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph) and turn the multimode control switch knob fully clockwise.

If the fourwheel drive indicator light con- tinues to blink when you operate the mul- timode control switch knob from the H2 to the H4 position, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not securely in H4 mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler- ating or decelerating.

If the fourwheel drive indicator light con- tinues to blink and the buzzer sounds when you operate the multimode control switch knob from the H2 to the H4 position, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in H4 mode. Stop the ve- hicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate the switch knob again.

To shift from H4 (unlocked) to H2, turn the multimode control switch knob fully counterclockwise.

This can be done at any speed.

If the fourwheel drive indicator light con- tinues to blink when you operate the mul- timode control switch knob from the H4 to the H2 position, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not securely in H2 mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler- ating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

If the indicator light continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the fourwheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multimode control switch knob if the wheels are slip- ping. Stop the slipping or spinning before operating.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 (UNLOCKED) AND H4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in H4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN L4 (UNLOCKED) AND L4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in L4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 AND L4

To shift from H4 to L4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and push and turn the multimode control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from L4 to H4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and turn the multimode control switch knob counterclockwise.

(c) Shifting procedure

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

145

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light continues to blink when you operate the multimode control switch knob to the H4 or L4 position, drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, shift the automatic transmission selector lever se- curely into N and operate the switch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the fourwheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multimode control switch knob if the wheels are slip- ping. Stop the slipping or spinning before operating.

The traction control system automatical- ly helps prevent the spinning of rear wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to ON, the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi- tions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the rear wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road condi- tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the trac- tion control system is in the selfcheck mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper- ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the rear wheels. At this time, the slip indi- cator light blinks.

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

146

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

If your wheels get stuck in an ditch when you are driving on a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control system. This system that con- trols engine performance may interfere with the process of freeing your wheels.

To turn off: Push TRAC OFF switch.

The TRAC OFF indicator light will come on.

The vehicle stability control system is al- ways activated, even if the traction control system is turned off.

To turn on: Push TRAC OFF switch once again.

The TRAC OFF indicator light will go off.

The traction control system will automati- cally go on, and the TRAC OFF indicator light will go off when you drive over 30 km/h (19 mph) even if the TRAC OFF switch is pushed to cancel the traction control system.

TRAC OFF indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. It will come on again when you push the TRAC OFF switch to turn off the system.

The light may come on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON. It is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the TRAC OFF indicator light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

147

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to ON.

The indicator light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The indicator light comes on with the normal driving mode while driving.

VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

Hillstart assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the above mentioned systems such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the sys- tems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the traction control system can no longer op- erate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the VSC TRAC warning light will come on and the traction control sys- tem temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the traction control system does not operate, there is no problem to continue your driv- ing.) The system will be automatically re- stored after a short time and the VSC TRAC warning light goes out.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

148

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the light comes on while driving, the traction control system does not work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The TRAC OFF indicator light will come on when the VSC TRAC warning light comes on even if the TRAC OFF switch is not pushed.

The active traction control system auto- matically helps prevent the spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to ON, the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi- tions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the 4 wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road condi- tions.

Leave the system on during the ordi- nary driving so that it can operate when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the ac- tive traction control system is in the self check mode, but does not indicate a mal- function.

When the active traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the 4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica- tor light blinks.

Active traction control system

(fourwheel drive models)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

149

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

Hillstart assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the above mentioned systems such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the sys- tems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the active traction control system can no lon- ger operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on and the active traction con- trol system temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Al- though the active traction control system does not operate, there is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the VSC TRAC warning light goes out.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

150

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the light comes on while driving, the active traction control system does not work. However, as normal braking oper- ates when being applied, there is no prob- lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as antilock brake sys- tem, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road sur- face or operating steering wheel abrupt- ly.

The vehicle stability control activates when the vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the sys- tem is in the selfcheck mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the ve- hicle stability control system. Even if the vehicle stability control sys- tem is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driv- ing will result in an unexpected ac- cident. If the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds, special care should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly. When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Toyota dealer. (See Checking and replacing tires on page 333 in Section 72.)

Vehicle stability control system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

151

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv- ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Fourwheel drive models only

Pushing the center differential lock switch automatically turns the vehicle stability control system off. At this time, the VSC OFF indicator comes on with the center differential lock indi- cator light.

VSC OFF indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. It will come on again when you push the center differential lock switch to turn off the system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to ON.

The indicator light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The indicator light comes on when the system is on while driving.

NOTICE

Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light goes off before normal driving.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

152

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that when there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to ON, and will go off after about a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON. It is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle stability control system does not work. However, as normal braking oper- ates when being applied, there is no prob- lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

Twowheel drive models onlyThe TRAC OFF indicator light will come on when the VSC TRAC warning light comes on even if the TRAC OFF switch is not pushed.

The downhill assist control system is a system that assists the deceleration of the engine brake when you drive down a steep hill. When you are driving down a hill with the fourwheel drive control switch knob (fulltime fourwheel drive models) or multimode control switch knob (multimode fourwheel drive models) in the L4 position, push the DAC switch to limit the vehicles ac- celeration. If the vehicle is traveling at a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, you can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the down- hill assist control system. It may not be able to maintain a low speed over road surfaces or offroad surfaces on which sliding can easily occur, such as extremely steep slopes or icy or muddy roads.

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

153

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Fulltime fourwheel drive models Turn the fourwheel drive control switch knob to the L4 position.

The system will not operate if the four wheel drive control switch knob is in the H4 position.

Multimode fourwheel drive mod- elsTurn the multimode control switch knob to the L4 position.

The system will not operate if the multi mode control switch knob is in the H4 position.

2. In order to make full use of the en- gine brake, putting the transmission in L or 2 is recommended.

5speed automatic transmissionThe sys- tem will operate even if the transmission selector lever is in D, 4, 3 or N. However, when it is in L or 2 the en- gine brake can also be utilized enabling the system to operate more effectively.

4speed automatic transmissionThe sys- tem will operate even if the transmission selector lever is in D, 3 or N. Howev- er, when it is in L or 2 the engine brake can also be utilized enabling the system to operate more effectively.

3. Push the DAC switch to turn the system on. The downhill assist con- trol system indicator light on the in- strument panel will come on.

Fulltime fourwheel drive modelsIf the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes, the selector lever may be in N or the fourwheel drive control switch knob may be in the H4 position.

If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is pushed, contact your Toyota dealer.

Multimode fourwheel drive modelsIf the downhill assist control system indica- tor light flashes, the selector lever may be in N or the multimode control switch knob may be in the H2 or H4 position.

If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is pushed, contact your Toyota dealer.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

154

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release your foot from the accelerator or brake pedal to activate the system. The vehicle will descend the hill at a low speed. While the system is operating, the slip indicator light on the instrument panel will flash and the stop lights and high mounted stoplight will be lit.

If you push the DAC switch to turn the system off while it is in operation, the system will stop operating gradually. The downhill assist control system indicator light will flash to alert the driver. To con- tinue driving at a low speed, push the DAC switch to turn the system on.

The slip indicator light and downhill assist control system indicator light come on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If any of the indicator lights does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the system is used frequently, the brake actuator temperature may become too high and a buzzer will sound inter- mittently.

If this happens, the downhill assist control system indicator light will flash and a buzzer will sound intermittently. When the temperature of the brake actuator goes down, the system will begin to operate again. Until it restarts, the active traction control system and hillstart assist control system will not operate; however, the con- ventional brake can be operated.

If there is any abnormality in the sys- tem, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on. When the DAC switch is pushed, the downhill assist control sys- tem indicator light also flash.

If the VSC TRAC warning light comes on, there may be an abnormality in any of the following systems in addition to the downhill assist control system.

Hillstart assist control system

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

155

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

VSC TRAC warning light

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the above mentioned system on such as slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the sys- tems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the downhill assist control system can no lon- ger operate. In this case, stop your ve- hicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on and the downhill assist control system stops operating temporarily in order to protect the brake actuator. (Al- though the downhill assist control system does not operate, it is no problem to con- tinue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the VSC TRAC warning light goes out.

If the warning light comes on while driv- ing, the system does not work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The hillstart assist control system as- sists you in starting to move up a steep or slippery hill. When you start to move up the hill slope, the system helps to prevent the vehicle from roll- ing backward in the interval while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the hill start assist control system. The ve- hicle may not be able to start smoothly on road surfaces or off road surfaces such as extremely steep slopes or icy roads, on which sliding can occur very easily.

Do not use the hillstart assist con- trol system to stop the vehicle. This system is not designed as a func- tion for stopping the vehicle on a uphill slope.

Hillstart assist control system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

156

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The hillstart assist control system will operate for 5 seconds maximally when all of the following conditions apply.

5speed automatic transmission When the transmission is in any of positions D, 4, 3, 2 or L

4speed automatic transmission When the transmission is in any of positions D, 3, 2 or L

When the brake pedal is not de- pressed

The system is designed to operate when the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope; therefore, if the transmission is in P or N it will not operate. It will not operate either if the vehicle starts to move in reverse on a slope with the transmission in the R.

When the hillstart assist control system is operating, the slip indicator light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the same time, the stop lamps and high mounted stoplight are lit.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Keep in mind the following when driv- ing.

The hillstart assist control system op- erates for 5 seconds maximally. If both the brake and accelerator pedals re- main undepressed for longer than 5 seconds, the buzzer will sound at more frequent intervals and the system will gradually stop operating.

The hillstart assist control system is not designed as a function for stopping the vehicle on a uphill slope. When stopping the vehicle, be sure to de- press the brake pedal.

If the system is used frequently, the brake actuator temperature may become too high and a buzzer will sound inter- mittently.

In this case, a buzzer will sound intermit- tently. When the temperature of the brake actuator goes down, the system will begin to operate again. Until it restarts, the trac- tion control system (twowheel drive mod- els), active traction control system (four wheel drive models) and downhill assist control system will not operate; however, the conventional brake can be operated.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

157

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If there is any abnormality in the sys- tem, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on.

If the system malfunctions, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on.

If the VSC TRAC warning light comes on, there may be an abnormality in any of the following systems in addition to the hillstart assist control system.

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

VSC TRAC warning light

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the above mentioned system on such as slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the sys- tems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the hillstart assist control system can no lon- ger operate. In this case, stop your ve- hicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on and the hillstart assist control system stops operating temporarily in order to protect the brake actuator. (Al- though the hillstart assist control system does not operate, it is no problem to con- tinue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the VSC TRAC warning light goes out.

If the warning light comes on while driv- ing, the system does not work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

158

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This rear height control air suspension controls the vehicle height depending on the vehicle driving conditions. Select your desired height among the HI (high), N (normal) and LO (low) modes with the height select switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes

N (normal) mode

The vehicle height in this mode is standard. Regardless of the number of occupants or the luggage loading condition, the vehicle height is always automatically adjusted to a fixed height in this mode while the engine is running.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

HI (high) mode

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.) higher at rear than the N mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving on the bumpy roads and through water.

However, when the vehicle speed exceeds about 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the HI mode, the N mode is automatically selected.

CAUTION

The HI mode should be used for severe offroad driving condition only. Because the vehicles center of gravity is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in accident.

LO (low) mode

The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 in.) lower at rear than the N mode height.

This mode allows you easy access to the vehicle (getting in and out) and easy load- ing and unloading operation.

This mode is available when the vehicle speed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).

NOTICE

Use the LO mode when the vehicle is stopped. Otherwise, when the ve- hicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7 mph), N mode is selected automati- cally. So be careful when you drive in any place where the overhead height is limited.

(b) Vehicle height mode changing con- dition

To change the vehicle height, it is necessary to meet the following conditions.

The engine should be running.

The height control OFF indicator light should go off.

Rear height control air suspension

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

159

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When selecting a mode, there is a ve- hicle speed limit. Refer to the following table.

Yes = The mode can be selected. No = The mode cannot be selected.

LO mode

N mode

HI mode

Under about 12 km/h (7 mph)

Yes Yes Yes

Under about 30 km/h (19 mph)

No Yes Yes

About 30 km/h (19 mph) or over

No Yes No

In the following cases, the rear height control suspension will not operate.

The underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on bumpy roads.

The area around the rear suspension is coated with ice.

If the vehicle is moved to its usual loca- tion or the ice is removed and the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height control cannot be operated. In this case, turn off and restart the engine, then push the control switches.

(c) Vehicle height adjustment

To change the mode, push the height select switch on either side of (higher) or (lower).

The height control indicator light indicates which mode is selected. (See (e) Height control indicator light described below.)

Selecting the HI mode

Push the height select switch on the side when the vehicle speed is under about 30 km/h (19 mph).

To change the N mode to HI, push the switch once.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

160

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To change the LO mode to HI, push the switch twice. It takes about 30 sec- onds until the LO mode changes to the HI mode.

Selecting the N mode

To change the HI mode to N, push the height select switch on the side once.

To change the LO mode to N, push the height select switch on the side once.

Selecting the LO mode

Push the height select switch on the side while the vehicle is stopped.

To change the N mode to LO, push the switch once.

To change the HI mode to LO, push the switch twice.

Even if the engine is stopped while the ve- hicle height is being lowered, the operation continues for up to 25 seconds. If, within this 25 seconds, any of the side doors or the back door is opened, operation will continue for a further 15 seconds.

NOTICE

If the vehicle height is changed fre- quently when the vehicle is heavily loaded, the compressor may over- heat, causing the vehicle height ad- justment operation to stop.

Before you lower the vehicle height with the height select switch, check under the vehicle to make sure nothing to damage the vehicle or no one to be injured is there and that the underbody of the vehicle does not touch the ground.

After unloading, the height of a ve- hicle equipped with the rear height control air suspension becomes slightly higher than the normal ve- hicle height. Take sufficient care where the overhead height is re- stricted.

Do not select the LO mode in the bumpy roads. If the underbody of the vehicle touches the rugged road surface, the vehicle may be dam- aged.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

161

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(d) Turning off the rear height control air suspension

To turn off the rear height control air suspension with the vehicle stopped, push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch. The height control OFF indi- cator light comes on and the vehicle height is fixed in the same mode as the height control switch is pushed.

This status is memorized in the system even after the engine is stopped.

If you push the switch again, the height control OFF indicator light goes out and the rear height control air suspension is turned on.

Even after the rear height control air suspen- sion is turned off with the HEIGHT CON- TROL OFF switch, if the vehicle speed ex- ceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the rear height control air suspension automatically selects the N mode.

CAUTION

If you drive through deep water over about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the HI mode with the height select switch and then turn off the rear height control air suspension by pushing the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch.

NOTICE

When jacking up or installing tire chains, be sure to turn off the rear height control air suspension by pushing the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch and stop the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an un- expected accident.

If your vehicle must be towed, put the vehicle height in the N mode and turn off the rear height control air suspension. Otherwise, the ve- hicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, re- sulting in an unexpected accident.

If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off the rear height control air suspen- sion with the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function resulting in an unexpected accident.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

162

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(e) Height control indicator lights

1. Height control indicator lights

2. Height control OFF indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, all the indicator lights come on. The indicator light showing the present mode only remains on and all other lights go off after a few sec- onds. This means the system operates correct- ly.

If you change the vehicle height mode, the indicator lights change as follows:

When changing the vehicle height from the N mode to HI:

1. The N mode indicator light goes off and the HI mode indicator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reaches the HI mode, the HI mode indicator light remains on.

If the underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on bumpy roads or the area around the rear suspension is coated with ice, the vehicle height cannot be lowered with the height select switch. The height control indicator lights change as follows:

1. The present mode indicator light goes off and the selected mode indicator light blinks.

2. The selected mode indicator light goes off. (The vehicle height does not change.) The present mode indicator light comes on again.

In this case, even if the vehicle is moved to its usual location or the ice is removed and the height select switch is pressed, vehicle height control cannot be operated. Turn off the engine once and then restart it.

Height control OFF indicator light: When the ignition switch is turned on, this light comes on. If it goes out after a few seconds, the rear height control air sus- pension operates correctly. If you push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch, the rear height control air suspension is turned off. The height control OFF indicator light comes on.

In the following cases, there is a problem somewhere in the rear height control air suspension. Although there is no problem to continue normal driving, have the rear height control air suspension checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

163

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The height control OFF indicator light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned on.

The height control OFF indicator light blinks.

(f) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to park the vehicle after offroad driving, the ve- hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve- hicle becomes cool. When parking, make sure there is nothing that will be in con- tact with the underbody of the vehicle. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.

If you park the vehicle for a long time, the vehicle height may be gradually low- ered. When parking for a long time, make sure there is nothing that will be in con- tact with the underbody of the vehicle. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle height may change in accordance with the change in the temperature. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.

(g) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in the rear height control air suspension, the N mode is automatically selected. If this oc- curs, the height control OFF indicator light blinks and the vehicle height control cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected. If this is the case, bring your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as possible and have it checked.

When parking, firmly apply the parking brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal. For better holding power, first de- press the brake pedal and hold it while setting the parking brake. To release: Depress the parking brake pedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake is set, the parking brake reminder light in the instrument panel remains on until you release the parking brake.

Parking brake

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

164

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the park- ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained up or down grades within the limits of engine performance, although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down the grades. On steeper hills, a greater speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slip- pery (rainy, icy or snowcovered) or winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the ONOFF button. This turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument panel shows that you can now set the vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth- er press will turn the system completely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en- gagement, keep the ONOFF button off when not using the cruise control.

Cruise control

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

165

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in D before you set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed, push the lever down in the SET direc- tion and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac- tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down for a slower speed. Each tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you need accelerationfor example, when passingdepress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release it, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the CANCEL di- rection and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto- matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancels out other than for the above cases, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal- er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the + RES direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac- celerate the vehicle and then push the lever down in the SET direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the SET direc- tion and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held down, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de- press the brake pedal and then push the lever down in the SET direction.

Even if you downshift from D to 4 (5speed automatic transmission) or 3 (4speed automatic transmission), with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

166

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the + RES direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be- low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes when using the cruise control, press the ONOFF button to turn the system off and then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc- curs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system.

The indicator light does not come on.

The indicator light flashes again.

The indicator light goes out after it comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

167

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Car audio system Reference 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat audio system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio system operating hints 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

SECTION 1 7

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

168

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type 1: AMFM radio/cassette player/com- pact disc player (with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AMFM radio/cassette player/com- pact disc player with changer

This section describes some of the basic features on Toyota audio systems. Some information may not pertain to your sys- tem.

Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off.

Push AM, FM, TAPE, DISC or LOAD to turn on that function without pushing PWRVOL. To turn on the cas- sette or compact disc player, a cassette or compact disc must be loaded in the player.

You can turn on each player by inserting a cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejecting the cassette tape or compact disc. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape or com- pact disc. If the another function was pre- viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push AM, FM, TAPE, DISC or LOAD if the system is already on but you want to switch from one function to another.

Reference Using your audio system Some basics

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

169

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your systems tone and balance controls, see the description of your own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, midrange and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with differ- ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the vol- ume of one group of sounds while de- creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed on the inside of the rear quarter window.

NOTICE

Attaching the film (especially conduc- tive or metallic type) on the rear quarter glass will noticeably reduce the sensitivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player and do not insert anything other than cas- sette tapes into the slot, or the tape player may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in with the label side up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label side is down.) The player will play from track 1 through the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than com- pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

170

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH CHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the LOAD button and gently push the disc in with the label side up. (The player will auto- matically eject a disc if the label side is down.) This compact disc player can store up to six discs. The player will play from track 1 through the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Do not stack up two discs for in- sertion, or it will cause damage to the compact disc player. Insert only one compact disc into slot at a time.

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything except a com- pact disc into the slot.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

171

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

Controls and features Type 1

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

172

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See TUNE or SEEK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The button num- ber and station frequency will appear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two FM stations for each button. (The display will show AM, FM1 or FM2 when you push AM or FM button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button to eject a cassette. Push the compact disc eject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push (preset button 4) to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently

selected ( indicates the top side, indicates the bottom side).

Autoreverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push (preset button 6) to fast for- ward a cassette tape. FF will appear on

the display. Push (preset button 5) to rewind a tape. REW will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push or TAPE button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push or TAPE button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the autoreverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold (preset button 6) or

(preset button 5) to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc play- er will resume playing.

AM

Push the AM button to turn on the radio and select the AM band. AM will appear on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal- ance adjustment function)

By using the AUDIO CONTROL knob, you can adjust the tone and sound bal- ance. On some models, you can also turn on or off the surround function.

Each time you push this knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance and turn on or off the surround function, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts lowpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts midpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts highpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

173

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround function. SURROUND ON or SURROUND OFF will appear on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the DISC button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com- pact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display one of the six following error messages.

WAIT: The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

ERROR 1: The disc may be dirty, dam- aged or inserted incorrectly (upside down). Clean the disc and reinsert it.

NO DISC: The compact disc changer of separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

ERROR 3: There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

ERROR 4: Overcurrent. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

CD OPEN: The compact disc changer lid of separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

With compact disc changer only

Use these buttons to select the disc you want to listen to.

Push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

Dolby B NR

If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction, push (preset button 3). will appear on the display. Push the button again to turn off Dolby B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc- tion, play your tapes with this button on or off according to the mode used to re- cord the tape. : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FM

Push the FM button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

PWRVOL (Power and Volume)

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off. Turn PWRVOL to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random featuresyou can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

174

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To play the tracks on one disc in random order: Quickly push and release RAND (preset

button 1). will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random fea- ture, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push RPT (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between tracks in order for the re- peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat featuresYou can either replay a disc track or a whole com- pact disc.

Repeating a track: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the track is playing.

will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only

Repeating a disc: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

175

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine: Push the SCAN button until you hear a

beep. SCAN will appear on the dis- play and the player will scan the first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button. Do this again to find the station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in- cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken word, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the begin- ning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ceived. ST appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prev- ent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono recep- tion.

TAPE

Push the TAPE button to play a cassette tape.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

176

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TEXT

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the com- pact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counter- clockwise to step down the frequency.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

177

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

Type 2

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

178

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See TUNE or SEEK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttons when you turn on the RDS. (See RDS button.)

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The preset but- ton number and station frequency will ap- pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM and RDS stations for each button. (The display will show AM, FM1, FM2 or FM TYPE when you push AM or FM but- ton.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or all compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to eject is displayed. Push and release the eject but- ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and hold the eject button until you hear a beep. The last compact disc played before pushing the button will be ejected first. If the ejected disc is not removed for a long time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push (preset button 4) to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently

selected ( indicates the top side, indicates the bottom side).

Autoreverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push (preset button 6) to fast for- ward a cassette tape. FF will appear on

the display. Push (preset button 5) to rewind a tape. REW will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push or TAPE button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push or TAPE button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the autoreverse feature.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

179

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player

Push and hold (preset button 6) or

(preset button 5) to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc play- er will resume playing.

AM

Push the AM button to turn on the radio and select the AM band. AM will appear on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal- ance adjustment function)

By using the AUDIO CONTROL knob, you can adjust the tone and sound bal- ance, and turn on or off the surround function.

Each time you push this knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance and turn on or off the surround function, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts lowpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts midpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts highpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround function. SURROUND ON or SUR- ROUND OFF will appear on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the DISC button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com- pact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display one of the six following error messages.

WAIT: The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

ERROR 1: The disc may be dirty, dam- aged or inserted incorrectly (upside down). Clean the disc and reinsert it.

NO DISC: The compact disc changer of separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

ERROR 3: There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

ERROR 4: Overcurrent. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

CD OPEN: The compact disc changer lid of separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

Dolby B NR

If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,

push (preset button 3). will appear on the display. Push the button again to turn off Dolby B NR.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

180

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc- tion, play your tapes with this button on or off according to the mode used to re- cord the tape. : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FM

Push the FM button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. FM1, FM2 or FM TYPE will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM and six RDS stations, three for each of the preset button. If the RDS is off or RDS stations are not preset to the preset buttons, FM TYPE will not appear on the display.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact discs in the compact disc player. This player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly push and release the button, then insert a compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and hold the button (until you hear a beep when the audio system is on), then insert the first compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close. After a few seconds, the shutter will auto- matically open again so the next disc can be inserted. The same process can be applied for loading the rest of the discs. If the player is full of discs, DISC FULL will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

PWRVOL (Power and Volume)

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off. Turn PWRVOL to adjust the volume.

RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data System (RDS). RDS station providing good reception is automatically selected if current reception worsens.

The RDS button turns the RDS on and off. This button is operational except in AM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold this button until you hear a beep and RDS will appear on the display. At this time, the radio starts to search the RDS sta- tions and RDS SEARCH will flash on the display.

Quickly push and release this button when the RDS turns on, the radio starts to search the RDS stations and RDS SEARCH will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found, FOUND and the number of the RDS sta- tions will appear on the display, and you will hear two beeps. The stations will be preset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, NO RDS ST will appear on the display and you will hear a beep, and the display returns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button until you hear a beep again.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

181

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

RAND (Random)

There are two random featuresyou can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order: Quickly push and release RAND (preset

button 1). will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random fea- ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push RPT (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between tracks in order for the re- peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat featuresYou can either replay a disc track or a whole com- pact disc.

Repeating a track: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the track is playing.

will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

Repeating a disc: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold or side of the SCAN button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next pre- set station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release or side of the SCAN button. The radio will find the next station up or down the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

182

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc: Quickly push and release or side of the SCAN button. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan up or down all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine: Push or side of the SCAN but-

ton until you hear a beep. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan up or down the first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the auto changer has scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button. Do this again to find the station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in- cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken word, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the begin- ning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ceived. ST appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prev- ent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono recep- tion.

TAPE

Push the TAPE button to play a cassette tape.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

183

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDS mode.

When an RDS radio station transmits a text message, TEXT will be displayed. At this time, push the TEXT button to view the text message. The message display will be canceled if any button that affects the display is pushed. To view the mes- sage again, push this button again. After the entire message has been displayed, the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory to store three 64character messages. To store a message in memory, push and hold the TEXT button until you hear a beep.

If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest message will be over- written by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the TEXT button momentarily. This will dis- play the most recent message. Each push of the button will display messages in the order of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or if there are no more messages to be re- called, NO MESSAGE will appear on the display, and the message display will be canceled.

The message display will be canceled if you activate any function that affects the display.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the com- pact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement (TA) feature on and off. This button is operational only in FM mode.

By pushing the TRAF button, TRAF SEEK will flash on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station.

When a traffic program station is found, TRAF will be displayed and you will hear a beep.

After the traffic announcement program is over, the display returns to the previous mode.

If no traffic program station is found, NO TRAF INFO appears on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, push this button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counter- clockwise to step down the frequency.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

184

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the TYPE button while receiving an RDS station, the current pro- gram type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the pro- gram type changes as in the following:

ROCK

EASY LIS (Easy listening)

CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

INFORM (Information)

RELIGION

MISC (Miscellaneous)

ALERT (Emergency message)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

185

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Some parts of the audio system can be adjusted using the switches on the steer- ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls, and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. switch

3. MODE switch

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

186

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Volume control switch

Push + to increase the volume. The vol- ume continues to increase while the switch is being pushed.

Push to decrease the volume. The volume continues to decrease while the switch is being pushed.

2. switch

Radio

This switch has the following features

To select a preset station: Quickly push and release the or side of the switch. Do this again to select the next preset station.

To seek a station: Push and hold the or side of the switch until you hear a beep. Do this again to find the next station. If you push the switch on either side during the seek mode, seeking will be cancelled.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features

To skip to a different track in either direc- tion: Quickly push and release the or side of the switch. FF 1 or REW 1 will appear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switch until the track you want to listen to is set. If you push the switch ten times, the skip function will turn off. (You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracks you want to rewind, remember to count the current track as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two tracks before the song you are listening to, push the side of the switch three times.

If you push the track switch further than you wanted to, push the other side of the switch. The track number will be in- creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not valid if it is higher than the number of the tracks remaining on the current side of the cassette.

When the tape reaches to the begin- ning, the player will automatically start playing that side.

After the tape reaches to the end, the player will automatically reverse and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between tracks for the track switch to work correctly. In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.

To fast forward or reverse: Push and hold the side of the switch to fast forward a cassette tape. FF will appear on the display. Push and hold the side of the switch to rewind a tape. REW will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward- ing, push the side of the switch. To stop the tape while it is rewinding, push the side of the switch.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the autoreverse feature.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the or side of the switch until the track you want to listen to is set. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, push the side of the switch once, quickly.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

187

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

With compact disc changer only

Push and hold the or side of the switch until the disc you want to listen to is set.

3. MODE switch

Push MODE switch to select an audio mode. Each push changes the mode se- quentially if the desired mode is ready to use.

To turn the audio system on, push the MODE switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and hold the MODE switch until the system turns off.

The rear seat audio system is designed for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the audio sound separately between the front seats and rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turned on with the rear audio system controller even if the front audio system is off. When the front audio is turned off, the rear audio system will be turned off simul- taneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all the modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape player, compact disc player, compact disc player with changer and DVD player) with the rear seat audio system when a cas- sette tape and discs are loaded in the front audio system.

When the same mode is selected on the front and rear audio systems at the same time, the system can be operated on the front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the front and rear audio systems at the same time, AM and FM modes cannot be changed on the rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat audio system with a special headphone. For details, re- fer to the manufacturers instructions.

The wireless headphone can be used with- in a radius of approximately 7 m (23 ft.) from the rear seat audio system. If the signal becomes weak, the headphone will mute.

You can purchase a wireless headphone at a Toyota dealer.

Rear seat audio system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

188

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not drive with using the head- phone. Otherwise, you may be hard to hear the sound from the outside while using the headphone and may cause an accident.

With DVD player:

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume lev- el that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in- creased, before you turn on the headphone.

The rear seat audio system consists of following components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat audio system display

3. Rear seat audio system controller

4. Controller holder

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

189

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The rear seat audio system can be oper- ated with the rear seat audio system con- troller.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the controller. It may cause an accident, fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct sunlight, high heat and high humidity. These conditions could cause the case to deform or the battery to ex- plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control- ler with an insulating sheet, which pre- vents the battery from being dis- charged. Before using the controller, remove the insulating sheet.

Rear seat audio system controller

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

190

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con- troller, direct the signal output portion of the controller to the signal reception portion of the rear seat audio system display.

The rear seat audio system controller can be operated when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

The controller does not operate properly when the signal reception portion of the display is exposed to direct sunlight. Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, and features of the controller, see CONTROLLER FEATURES on page 191 in this Section.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the controller may be damaged.

Do not drop or strongly knock the controller against hard objects.

Do not sit on or place heavy ob- jects on the controller.

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in the holder when it is not in use. The holder can be hooked on the back of the driv- ers or front passengers seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, stow the controller in the holder when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposed to high temperatures (such as on the instrument panel) for a long time, otherwise the controller may be dam- aged.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

191

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. and (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

2. and (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

3. ON/SOURCE button

4. OFF button

1. and (DISC/CH/PROG) but- tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations for the band of the front audio system. (For instructions, see Controls and features on page 171 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations: Push the or (DISC/CH/PROG) button. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band. The station frequency will appear on the dis- play.

Cassette tape player

Push the or (DISC/CH/PROG) button to select the other side of a cas- sette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected. ( indicates the top side, indicates the bottom side.)

Autoreverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

192

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Compact disc player and DVD player

With disc changer only Use these buttons to select the disc you want to listen to.

Push the or (DISC/CH/PROG) button until the number of the disc you want to listen to appears on the display.

2. and (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Use the or (TUNE/TRACK) but- ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the or (TUNE/TRACK) button briefly. Each time you push the button, the radio will step up or down to another frequency. If you push and hold the button and the radio will go into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the or (TUNE/ TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or down for a station of the nearest frequen- cy and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched automatically one after another.

Cassette tape player

To fast forward a cassette tape, push and hold the (TUNE/TRACK) button until FF will appears on the display. Push and hold the (TUNE/TRACK) button until REW appears on the display to rewind a tape.

Use this button to skip up or down to locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in- cluding current one).

Push the or (TUNE/TRACK) but- ton. FF 1 or REW 1 will appear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track button until the number on the display reaches the number of tracks you want to skip. If you push the button 10 times, the skip feature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly a blank space of at least 3 seconds is con- sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken, live, or classical re- cordings.

Compact disc player and DVD player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push the or (TUNE/TRACK) but- ton until the number of the track or chap- ter you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the begin- ning of the current track or chapter, quick- ly push the (TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

Push and hold the or (TUNE/ TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse within a disc. When you release the but- ton, the disc player will resume playing.

With disc changer only You can either scan the tracks or chap- ters on a specific disc or scan the first tracks or chapters of all the discs in the changer.

Scanning the tracks or chapters on a disc: Quickly push and release the or (TUNE/TRACK) button. LOAD will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks or chapters on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

193

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Scanning the first tracks or chapters of all the discs in the changer: Push and hold the or (TUNE/ TRACK) button. The player will scan the first track or chapter of the next disc. To stop scanning, release the button. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

3. ON/SOURCE button

Push the ON/SOURCE button to turn on the rear seat audio system.

Use the ON/SOURCE button to select an audio mode when the rear seat audio sys- tem is on. Each time you push this but- ton, the system changes between the ra- dio, cassette player, compact disc player, compact disc changer and DVD changer.

When you change the mode, the display indicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and discs are not loaded in the front audio system, only a radio mode can be selected in the rear seat audio system.

If you push the ON/SOURCE button on rear seat audio system controller to select the casette tape player mode or disc play- er mode in that case, a beep sounds from front audio system and INVALID flashes on the display for 6 seconds, and then the rear audio system returns to the radio mode.

If you push the ON/SOURCE button while receiving an emergency broadcast, a beep sounds and INVALID appears on the display to indicate that no button can be operated.

Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, AM will appear on the display.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a traffic announcement (TA) while the rear seat audio system is in the radio mode, TRAF will flash on the display and the rear seat audio system will turn off. When the front audio receives a traffic an- nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys- tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

TAPE appears on the display while this mode is selected.

Disc players

Compact disc mode

CD appears on the display while this mode is selected.

The display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

DVD video disc mode

DVD appears on the display while this mode is selected.

The display shows the track or chapter, or track or chapter and disc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display one of the five following error messages.

WAIT: The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

ERR 1: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (upside down). Clean the disc and reinsert it.

ERR 2: The compact disc changer of separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

194

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

ERR 3: There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

ERR 4: Overcurrent. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

OPEN: The compact disc changer lid of separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

4. OFF button

Push OFF button to turn off the rear seat audio system.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that small children do not swallow the re- moved battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the battery, be care- ful not to lose the components.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recom- mended by a Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the following procedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing the lock release button to the side.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

195

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put a new battery with the positive (+) side up.

Put in the case securely.

NOTICE

Make sure that the positive side of the controller battery is facing cor- rectly.

Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause rust.

Do not touch or move any compo- nents inside of the controller, or it may interfere with proper operation.

Be careful not to bend the electrode of the controller battery insertion and that dust or oil does not ad- here to the transmitter case.

Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the controller operates properly. If the control- ler still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op- erations:

Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system.

Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or compact disc into the slot.

The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the au- dio system. This does not indicate a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radioit is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Car audio system operating hints

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

196

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Here are some common reception prob- lems that probably do not indicate a prob- lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stationsGenerally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmit- ter. They are often accompanied by distor- tion.

MultipathFM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each oth- er out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception.

Static and flutteringThese occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swappingIf the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weak- ened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the origi- nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

FadingAM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphereespecially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio sta- tion, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interferenceWhen a reflected sig- nal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broad- cast.

StaticAM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electri- cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER AND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas- sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu- larly.

A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.)

Use highquality cassettes.

Lowquality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant autoreversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off.

Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside.

Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.

Avoid using cassettes with a total play- ing time longer than 100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

197

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER AND DISCS

Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

Extremely high temperatures can keep your compact disc player from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may cause your compact disc player to skip.

If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not hear any sound even though your compact disc player appears to be working. Remove the disc from the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazard- ous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.

Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player.

Copyprotected CD CDR (CDRecordable) CDRW (CDRewritable) CDROM

Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

198

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Labeled discs

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations.

Correct Wrong

Handle compact discs carefully, espe- cially when you are inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc player when you are not listening to them. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lintfree cloth that has been damp- ened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with another soft, lintfree cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or antistatic device.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

199

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Air conditioning system Controls 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel and rear vents 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 8

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

200

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. AUTO button

3. Temperature selector

4. A/C button

5. Air flow selector

6. Air intake selector

7. OFF button

Controls (without DUAL button)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

201

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

AUTO button

For automatic operation of the air condi- tioning, push the AUTO button. An indi- cator light will illuminate to show that the automatic operation mode has been se- lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and onoff of the air conditioning according to the tem- perature.

When you push the AUTO button with the air intake mode at FRESH, internal circulation may be applied for maximum cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want to select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, push the OFF button.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad- just the fan speed and push it. An indica- tor light will illuminate to show which fan speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to adjust the fan speed unless you desire another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the UP side, to decrease it, push the DOWN side.

LO appears when you adjust to maxi- mum cooling, and HI appears when you adjust to maximum warming.

OFF button

Push the OFF button to turn off the air conditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the vents used for air flow. An indicator light will illuminate to show which air flow mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to select the air flow unless you desire another air flow mode.

1. PanelAir flows from the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

2. BilevelAir flows from both the floor vents, the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

3. FloorAir flows mainly from the floor vents.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

202

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

4. Floor/WindshieldAir flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents.

5. WindshieldAir flows mainly from the windshield vents.

When this button is pressed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in- take selector button once again.

Press the A/C button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings, see Air flow selector settings described below.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source. An indicator light will illuminate to show which the air source is being selected.

1. RecirculateRecirculates the air inside the vehicle.

2. FreshDraws outside air into the sys- tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automati- cally to FRESH depending on the condi- tion of the air conditioning system.

A/C button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the A/C button. The A/C button indicator will come on. To turn the air conditioning off, push the button again.

If the A/C button indicator flashes, there is a problem in the air conditioning system and the air conditioning automatically shuts off. If this happens, take your ve- hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

203

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. Temperature selector (at the independent mode: for driver) (at the linked mode: for driver and front passenger)

3. AUTO button

4. DUAL button

5. Temperature selector (for front passenger)

6. Air flow selector

7. Air intake selector

8. A/C button

9. OFF button

Controls (with DUAL button)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

204

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

AUTO button

For automatic operation of the air condi- tioning, push the AUTO button. An indi- cator light will illuminate to show that the automatic operation mode has been se- lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and onoff of the air conditioning according to the tem- perature.

When you push the AUTO button with the air intake mode at FRESH, internal circulation may be applied for maximum cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want to select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, push the OFF button.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad- just the fan speed and push it. An indica- tor light will illuminate to show which fan speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to adjust the fan speed unless you desire another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the side, to decrease it, push the side.

LO appears when you adjust to maxi- mum cooling, and HI appears when you adjust to maximum warming.

DUAL button

This button is used to set the tempera- tures independently for the drivers seat and front passenger seat.

Pushing the button changes the mode from independent and linked.

Independent mode: Temperatures can be set independently for the drivers seat and front passengers seat. An indicator light will illuminated to show that the indepen- dent mode has been selected.

Linked mode: The same temperature is set for the drivers seat and front passen- gers seat.

When the temperature for the front pas- sengers seat is changed in linked mode, the mode is changed automatically to in- dependent mode.

OFF button

Push the OFF button to turn off the air conditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the vents used for air flow. An indicator light will illuminate to show which air flow mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to select the air flow unless you desire another air flow mode.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

205

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. PanelAir flows from the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

2. BilevelAir flows from both the floor vents, the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

3. FloorAir flows mainly from the floor vents.

4. Floor/WindshieldAir flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents.

5. WindshieldAir flows mainly from the windshield vents.

When this button is pressed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in- take selector button once again.

Press the A/C button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings, see Air flow selector settings described below.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source. An indicator light will illuminate to show which the air source is being selected.

1. RecirculateRecirculates the air inside the vehicle.

2. FreshDraws outside air into the sys- tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automati- cally to FRESH depending on the condi- tion of the air conditioning system.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

206

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

A/C button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the A/C button. The A/C button indicator will come on. To turn the air conditioning off, push the button again.

If the A/C button indicator flashes, there is a problem in the air conditioning system and the air conditioning automatically shuts off. If this happens, take your ve- hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

207

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To cool off your Toyota after it has been parked in the hot sun, drive with the windows open for a few minutes. This vents the hot air, allowing the air conditioning to cool the interior more quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked (by leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The windshield could fog up because of the difference in air temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to circulate through- out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce the amount of fogging on the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the ve- hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake selector be set to FRESH and the fan speed selector to any setting.

Air flow selector settings Operating tips

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

208

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake selector be temporarily set to RECIRCULATE, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO button. TemperatureTo the desired

temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air conditioningOFF

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards WARM Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowFLOOR Air conditioningOFF

For quick heating, select recirculated air for a few minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select fresh af- ter the vehicle interior has been war- med.

Press the A/C button on for dehumidi- fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior while defrosting or defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO button. TemperatureTo the desired

temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air conditioningON

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards COLD Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowPANEL Air conditioningON

For quick cooling, select recirculated air for a few minutes.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

209

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Ventilation

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO button. TemperatureTowards low temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air conditioningOFF

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards COLD Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowPANEL Air conditioningOFF

Defogging and defrosting

The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

TemperatureTowardshigh temperature to heat;low temperature to cool

Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowardshigh temperature

to heat;low temperature to cool

Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow button turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but- ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto- matically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE- CIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.

Press the A/C button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshieldthe difference be- tween the outside and inside tempera- tures could make the fogging worse.

The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

TemperatureTowards high temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards high temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

210

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Pressing the windshield air flow button turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but- ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto- matically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE- CIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.

Press the A/C button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

To heat the vehicle interior while de- frosting the windshield, choose floor/windshield air flow.

Center vents

Side vents

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the instrument panel vents and rear vents. The instrument panel vents and rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.

Instrument panel and rear vents

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

211

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Other equipment Multiinformation display 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tissue box holder 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trash holder 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front cup holders 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cup holders and tray 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tiedown hooks 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double deck 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 9

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

212

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. RESET button

2. MODE button

3. Air conditioning system without DUAL buttonCruise information display

Air conditioning system with DUAL buttonOutside temperature and cruise information display

4. Clock

5. Air conditioning system without DUAL button onlyOutside temperature display

6. :00 button

7. M button

8. H button

Multiinformation display

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

213

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Operate the multiinformation display with the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the last previously used mode dis- played just before the ignition switch is turned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the multiinformation display, the display will automatically be set to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

The digital clock indicates the time.

The key must be in the ACC or ON position.

To reset the hour: Push the H button. To reset the minutes: Push the M button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de- sired, push the :00 button.

For example, if the :00 button is de- pressed when the time is between 1:011:29, the time will change to 1:00. If the time is between 1:301:59, the time will change to 2:00.

If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time dis- play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one oclock).

The outside temperature display indi- cates the outside air temperature. The displayed value is updated.

The displayed temperature ranges from 30C (22F) up to 50C (122F).

If there is some abnormality in the con- nection of the outside air temperature sen- sor, C (F) will appear on the display. If C (F) appears on the display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that C (F) appears momentarily when the ignition is quickly turned to ON. It is normal if it goes out soon.

Before using the multiinformation display Clock

Outside temperature display (air conditioning system without DUAL button)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

214

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Air conditioning system with DUAL button only

The outside temperature display (air conditioning system with DUAL but- ton) and cruise information display indi- cates the following information.

Every time you push the MODE but- ton, the display toggles through this information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Driving range

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Average vehicle speed

5. Display off

The displayed values in the cruise infor- mation display indicate general driving conditions. Accuracy varies with driving habits and road conditions.

1. Outside temperature (OUTSIDE C or OUTSIDE F)

The outside temperature display indi- cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed value is updated every 1 second.

The displayed temperature ranges from 30C (22F) up to 50C (122F).

If there is some abnormality in the con- nection of the outside air temperature sen- sor, C (F) will appear on the display. If C (F) appears on the display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that C (F) appears momentarily when the ignition is quickly turned to ON. It is normal if it goes out soon.

Cruise information display

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

215

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Driving range (RANGE MI or RANGE km)

The distance the vehicle can travel with the remaining fuel is calculated and displayed based on the quantity of re- maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates the approximate distance that you can drive until the fuel gauge reaches E. It is different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated about ev- ery 10 seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal- culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv- ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con- sumption is good, the driving range will be longer. If fuel consumption is poor, the driving range will be shorter.

If the low fuel level warning light comes on, refuel even if the display indicates that the vehicle can be driven further.

3. Average fuel consumption (AVG. MPG or AVG. L/100 km)

Average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on total driving distance and total fuel consumption with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev- ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the RESET button about 1 second.

4. Average vehicle speed (AVG. MPH or AVG. km/h)

Average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based on total driving dis- tance and total driving time with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev- ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the RESET button about 1 second.

The direction is indicated on the inside rear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off with the system on, the system will automati- cally turn back on when the ignition switch is turned on.

Push the COMP switch to turn the com- pass system on and off.

Compass

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

216

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The compass indicates the direction that the vehicle is heading. In the above case, it shows that the vehicle is heading north.

Displays Directions

N NE E

SE S

SW W

NW

North Northeast

East Southeast

South Southwest

West Northwest

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af- ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off imme- diately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the earths magnetic field is subject to in- terference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Refer to the CALIBRATING THE COMPASS be- low to set the zone number.

The compass works to calibrate the direc- tion automatically while the vehicle is in motion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for complete calibrating, see CALIBRATING THE COMPASS below.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the wind- shield.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror of the vehicle. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

217

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)

The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction deter- mined by the earths magnetic field. The angle of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle, then push and hold the COMP switch until the zone number appears on the dis- play. Then push the COMP switch, refer- ring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

218

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system for several seconds returns it to the compass mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

Hawaii: 5 Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

219

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the compass may not change after a turn. To rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and hold the COMP switch until C appears on the display.

If C appears on the display because of a drastic change in the magnetic field, perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is completed when the direction is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed because of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased your Toyota. And then always perform circling calibration after the battery has been removed, re- placed or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earths magnetic field is subject to in- terference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec- tric systems (moon roof, power win- dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

220

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and ve- hicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

Rear console box

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed for power supply for car accessories.

In the rear console boxTo use the power outlet, push the lid of the auxil- iary box to open.

The key must be in the ACC or ON position for the power outlet to be used.

Power outlet (12 VDC)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

221

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/120W.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid into the outlet may cause electrical fail- ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply for electric ap- pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the ON position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out- let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the power supply. The power supply will restart automatically when you use an appliance that operates within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off. When the power out- let is not in use, make sure that the main switch is turned off.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

222

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the ap- propriate plug that fits the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances even though their power consumption is un- der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt- age: cathoderay tube type televisions, compressordriven refrigerators, electric pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre- cise data: medical equipment, measur- ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer controlled electric blankets, touch sen- sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

With the instrument panel lights on, the glove box light will come on.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn it clockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

Glove box

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

223

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

On some models, an auxiliary box is located inside the glove box.

To increase the capacity of the glove box, raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box.

The garage door opener (

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc.

Garage door opener

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

224

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

(a) Programming the HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a new battery in the handheld transmitter prior to program- ming.

The battery side of the handheld trans- mitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink during the programming pro- cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure in Programming an entrance gate/pro- gramming all devices in the Canadian market.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.

2. Place your handheld garage transmit- ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the handheld garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink but- ton.

4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden- tify if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The ga- rage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading Programming a rolling code sys- tem.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re- maining HomeLink button to program another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading Programming the HomeLink before proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the training button on the ceil- ing mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owners guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this training button.

2. Press the training button on the ceil- ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicles pro- grammed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

225

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink unit and be able activate the garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re- maining HomeLink button to program another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program- ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but- tons you want to program.

2. Place your handheld gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the handheld gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device oper- ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re- maining HomeLink button to program another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure Programming the HomeLink.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink

memory.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

226

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and ob- jects are out of the way of the ga- rage door or other device to pre- vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer- sal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as re- quired by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door open- er which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and re- verse), does not meet current feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death.

FCC ID: CB2300NHL3 CANADA: 2791032088

This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifi- cations not expressly approved by the partly responsible for compliance could void the users authority to op- erate the device.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the lids as shown in the following illustra- tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed while driving.

Type AAs this holder is designed for holding a light object such as eyeglasses, do not place any heavy objects in them. Heavy objects may cause the holder to open and the contents to fly out resulting in inju- ries.

NOTICE

Type ADuring hot weather, the inte- rior of the vehicle becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

227

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type A (over head console)

Type B (instrument panel)

Type C (rear console box)

Type D (rear tire house)

Type E (right side of luggage compart- ment)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

228

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The right side of luggage compartment auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to hold the objects.

To use the belt, do the following.

1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.

2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.

Make sure the objects are securely held.

CONSOLE BOX TABLE

To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the table closed while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the table, do not place any object heavier than 1 kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leave any object on the table for a long time.

Using the holding belts Rear console box

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

229

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull up the console box lid while pushing the lock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the console box closed while driving.

The rear console box is equipped with a tissue box holder on the inside of the rear console box lid.

To use the tissue box holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push- ing the lock release button.

2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, keep the console box lid closed when it is not in use.

Tissue box holder

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

230

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The rear console box is equipped with a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push- ing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder Trash holder

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

231

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The trash holder is designed to use the grocery bag as a trash bag.

To use the trash holder:

1. Raise the trash holder.

2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder by hanging its handles on the two hooks indicated at the left and right.

The trash holder can support to 1 kg (2.20 lb.).

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, keep the trash holder closed when it is not in use.

If the trash holder is pulled strongly or stepped on, it will detach from the rear console box to protect it from damag- ing.

If the trash holder becomes detached, re- install it in a horizontal direction as indi- cated in the illustration. It cannot be installed in any other direction.

NOTICE

Do not deliberately pull or step on the trash holder, as it may be dam- aged or broken.

Front cup holders

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

232

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The cup holders are designed for hold- ing cups or drinkcans securely.

The cup holder can be adjustable to the size of the cups or drinkcans by changing the holder position and the arm position, as shown.

With the instrument panel lights on, the front cup holder position indicator lights will come on.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drinkcans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly in- jured people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

1. To use the rear cup holders and tray, pull the armrest out.

Rear cup holders and tray

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

233

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The cup holders are designed for hold- ing cups or drinkcans securely.

2. To use the rear cup holder, push and pull it out.

3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drinkcans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when it is not in use.

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the tray closed while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the tray, do not place any object heavier than 2 kg (4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave any object on the tray for a long time.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

234

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Front doors

Rear doors

The bottle holders are designed to hold bottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for any other purpose for which it was intended. Inappropriately sized or shaped objects may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly in- jure people in the vehicle during a sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in the bottle holder because the con- tents may spill when the door opens or closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie down hooks as shown above.

See Luggage stowage precautions on page 253 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie down hooks folded in place on the floor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors instead of the tiedown hooks.

Bottle holders Tiedown hooks

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

235

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

These hooks are designed to hang things like grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, do not hang any object heavier than 1 kg (2.20 lb.) in it.

These hooks are designed to hang the cargo net.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks and rear tiedown hooks.

Although the cargo net itself is not in- cluded as an original equipment, these hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.

Grocery bag hooks Cargo net hooks Luggage cover

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

236

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the front hooks of the lug- gage cover to the head restraint.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident. REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, detach its hooks from the head restraint. Then, retract and release both ends, and re- move the luggage cover.

After you remove the luggage cover, place it somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent passengers from injury in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

To use the double deck:

1. Turn the left and right knobs from the LOCK position to the UNLOCK position.

Double deck

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

237

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Hold the handle and raise the double deck on the rear tire houses.

3. Turn the left and right knobs from the UNLOCK position to the LOCK position.

Make sure the double deck is securely locked.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop, make sure that the double deck knobs are always in the LOCK posi- tion when the double deck is in the raised or lowered position.

NOTICE

When using the double deck at the raised position, do not place any ob- ject heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.).

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

238

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The roof luggage carrier consists of roof rails (1) attached to the roof and sliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, do this.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired position for loading the luggages of various sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturers instructions and precautions when installing the attach- ments or their equivalent.

Paint mark

When there is no luggage on the roof luggage carrier, Toyota recommends that the front and rear cross rails be secured in the positions indicated in the illustra- tion, according to the following procedure. This may diminish wind noise during driv- ing.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the ends of the cross rails to the paint mark.

3. Be sure to tighten the cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug- gage carrier, observe the following:

Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.

If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (See Dimensions and cargo load on page 352 in Section 8 for information on your vehicle overall length and width.)

Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneu- vers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle cor- rectly.

Roof luggage carrier

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

239

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then dur- ing the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof. Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock- ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driv- ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

240

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

241

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR TOYOTA Information before driving your Toyota Offroad vehicle precautions 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breakin period 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threeway catalytic converters 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridiumtipped spark plugs 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage stowage precautions 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitedslip differential 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyotas identification 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

242

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve- hicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of offroad applications. Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passen- ger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advan- tage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not de- signed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than lowslung sports cars de- signed to perform satisfactorily under offroad conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau- tions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle:

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per- son is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is mov- ing.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu- vers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneu- vers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle cor- rectly.

Offroad vehicle precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

243

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Always slow down in gusty cross- winds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your ve- hicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

When driving offroad or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicles suspension and chassis.

Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your ve- hicle (or any similar offroad ve- hicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or back- ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate breakin. But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:

Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.

Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un- leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mixups, your Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with un- leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan- dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5M93 in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three way catalytic converter to lose its ef- fectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs.

Breakin period Fuel

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

244

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating or research octane number lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accel- erating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid buildup of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named WorldWide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of three categories that depend on required emission lev- els. In the U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quali- ty by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re- formulated gasoline that contains oxy- genates such as ethanol or MTBE is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gas- oline provide excellent vehicle perfor- mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im- prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con- taining MMT is used, your emission con- trol system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in- strument cluster may come on. If this hap- pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser- vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the partic- ular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Toyota dealer.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

245

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel sys- tem damage or vehicle performance problems.

If driveability problems occur (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue the use.

Take care not to spill gasohol dur- ing refueling. Gasohol may cause paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup- plying fuel to the engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition switch to ACC or LOCK once and start it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor- rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane number).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

246

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1GRFE engine

2UZFE engine

The threeway catalytic converter is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible mate- rials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easi- ly such as grass, leaves, paper or rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the threeway catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions:

Use only unleaded gasoline.

Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creat- ing an excessive load on the three way catalytic converter.

Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 min- utes.

Avoid racing the engine.

Do not pushstart or pullstart your vehicle.

Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving.

Threeway catalytic converters

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

247

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Keep your engine in good running order. Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electronic ignition system/distributor ignition system or fuel systems could cause an ex- tremely high threeway catalytic converter temperature.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a checkup as soon as possible. Remember, your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle and its threeway catalytic converter sys- tem best.

To ensure that the threeway cata- lytic converter and the entire emis- sion control system operate proper- ly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supple- ment.

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.

Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine run- ning. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.

Keep the back door and back win- dow closed while driving. An open or unsealed back door and back window, may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of your vehicles ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the wind- shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth- er obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with the windows open and the back door and back window closed. Have the cause im- mediately located and corrected.

Engine exhaust cautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

248

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in main- taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con- sume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a pis- ton moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel. High tem- perature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de- pends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the conditions the vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by highspeed driv- ing and frequent acceleration and decel- eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600 miles)

When judging the amount of oil con- sumption, note that the oil may become diluted and make it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and consumes a nor- mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK

One of the most important points in prop- er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en- gine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.

Facts about engine oil consumption

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

249

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

For detailed information on oil level check, see Checking the engine oil level on page 324 in Section 72.

Your engine is fitted with iridiumtipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridiumtipped spark plugs and do not adjust gaps for your en- gine performance and smooth drive- ability.

This brake system has 2 independent hy- draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the ped- al will be harder to press, and your stop- ping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres- surized by the pump to powerassist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuous- ly. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal- er.

It is not a malfunction that the brake sys- tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec- onds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Iridiumtipped spark plugs (2UZFE engine) Brake system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

250

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid pressure reserve.

Even if the power assist is com- pletely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than nor- mal. And your braking distance will increase.

ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with ABS warning light)

The antilock brake system is designed to help prevent lockup of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steer- ing performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the antilock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the antilock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performan- ce.

The antilock brake system becomes op- erative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cov- er, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the antilock brake sys- tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the antilock brake system is in the selfcheck mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the antilock brake system is ac- tivated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunc- tion of the system:

You may hear the antilock brake sys- tem operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the ve- hicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the ve- hicle is stopped.

At the end of the antilock brake sys- tem activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

251

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the antilock brake system: Although the antilock brake system assists in providing ve- hicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, be- cause there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the antilock brake system does not provide vehicle control.

Antilock brake system is not de- signed to shorten the stopping dis- tance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an antilock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping dis- tance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differ- ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The antilock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respec- tive wheels turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping dis- tance.

Type A

Type B

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

252

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

ABS warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. If the anti lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the following systems do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

Antilock brake system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the antilock brake system does not operate so that the wheels will lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

VSC TRAC warning light may come on with the ABS warning light (brake assist system warning light) when there is a mal- function somewhere in the antilock brake system (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions oc- curs, this indicates a malfunction some- where in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri- ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the ABS warning light remains on together with the brake system warn- ing light, immediately stop your ve- hicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the antilock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unsta- ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- tion:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

DRUMINDISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drumindisc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs beddingdown of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

253

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed- dingdown.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emer- gency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow- erful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal- function.

The brake assist system becomes opera- tive after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this systems warn- ing light, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 117 in Sec- tion 15.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to where replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro- tor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when necessary.

When stowing luggage or cargo in the vehicle, observe the following:

Put luggage or cargo in the luggage compartment when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle bal- anced. Locating the weight as far for- ward as possible helps maintain bal- ance.

For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

To prevent luggage or packages from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the lug- gage compartment higher than the seatbacks. Keep luggage or pack- ages low, as close to the floor as possible.

Do not exceed 66 kg (145 lb.) of cargo load in the luggage compart- ment.

Do not place anything on the flat- tened seat or it may slide forward during braking.

Brake pad wear limit indicators Luggage stowage precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

254

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not de- signed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

Do not place anything on the lug- gage cover. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident. Secure all items in a safe place.

Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the drivers field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turn- ing, and impair the drivers control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond the cargo load specified on page 352 in Section 8.

Your Toyota is equipped with a limitedslip center differential (transfer). If one wheel begins to spin, the limitedslip center dif- ferential (transfer) is designed to aid trac- tion by automatically transmitting driving force to the wheels on the other drive axle. It transmits driving force to the front wheels if a rear wheel spins, and to the rear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by a jack. The vehicle could be driven off the jack and could pose a danger or re- sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the same brand, size, construction and load ca- pacity as the original tires on your Toyota because damage to the limit- edslip differential could possibly oc- cur with another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel, and can be seen through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

Limitedslip differential (fourwheel drive models)

Your Toyotas identification Vehicle identification number

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

255

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the Certification Label.

1GRFE engine

2UZFE engine

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Engine number

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

256

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your new vehicle carries theft preven- tion labels which are approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat- ing the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroy- ing the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to anoth- er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may vio- late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling charac- teristics resulting in loss of control.

Determine what kind of tires your ve- hicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are highspeed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, sum- mer tires are inadequate for driving on snowcovered or icy roads. For driving on snowcovered or icy roads, we recom- mend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in accel- eration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

Theft prevention labels (except for Canada) Suspension and chassis Types of tires

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

257

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling charac- teristics, resulting in loss of con- trol.

Do not use tire other than the manufacturers designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

258

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

259

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

STARTING AND DRIVING Starting and driving Before starting the engine 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offroad driving precautions 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 275. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

260

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Check the area around the vehicle be- fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle, head restraint height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to START position and release it, the cranking hold function continues to crank the engine in ON position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank the engine again, wait a few sec- onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in START position, the function will keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- sories.

3. Put the selector lever in P. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector le- ver in N. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine How to start the engine Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

261

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol- low the instructions in (a) Before crank- ing.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen- tial multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper airfuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows:

1. With your foot off the accelerator ped- al, turn the ignition key to START position, then release it.

2. After the engine runs for about 10 se- conds, you are ready to drive.

If the weather is below freezing, let the engine warm up for a few minutes before driving.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce- dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See If your vehicle will not start on page 278 in Section 4.

NOTICE

Do not race a cold engine.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos- sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving onto high, sharpedged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Other- wise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmis- sion in P. If necessary, block the wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you, and then press the pedal lightly. If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the park- ing brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

(b) Starting the engine Tips for driving in various conditions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

262

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When you drive on a bumpy road, it is recommended that the vehicle height should be set in the N (normal) or H (high) mode.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unat- tended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly.

Be careful when accelerating, up- shifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. Sudden accelera- tion or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to con- sult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are highspeed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the park- ing brake will not hold the vehicle securely.

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: If you drive through deep water over about 500 mm (20 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the H (high) mode with the height select switch and then turn off the rear height control air sus- pension by pushing the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch. Drive your vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or low- er speed.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

263

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When driving your vehicle offroad, please observe the following precautions to en- sure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to offroad vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where offroad vehicles are permitted to trav- el.

b. Respect private property. Get owners permission before entering private prop- erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that re- strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi- tions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to pre- vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle offroad, consult the following organizations.

State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

State Motor Vehicle Bureau

Recreational Vehicle Clubs

U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau- tions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle:

Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.

Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving offroad. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

Always check your brakes for effec- tiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under- body. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per- son is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is mov- ing.

When driving offroad or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicles suspension and chassis.

Offroad driving precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

264

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also en- ter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oils lubricating qualities.

Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system com- ponents.

Always perform a maintenance in- spection after each day of offroad driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance informa- tion, refer to the Scheduled Main- tenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro- tected against freezing.

Your coolant must contain ethyleneglycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protec- tion of aluminum components. Use Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant or equivalent.

See page 326 in Section 72 for details about coolant type selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommend to use 60% solution for your Toyota, to provide protection down to about 50C (58F). Do not use more than 70% solu- tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery and cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter start- ing. Section 73 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the level of charge.

Winter driving tips

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

265

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather.

See page 324 in Section 72 for recom- mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum- mer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Toyota dealerhe will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock deicer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti- freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturers directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may dam- age your vehicles paint.

Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into P and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze, making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emer- gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

266

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passengerandloadcarrying vehicle. Tow- ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability and driving economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safe- ty and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your local Toyota dealer for further details be- fore towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When disconnecting a trailer, put the vehicle height in the LO (low) mode and push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed in the auto- matic leveling function, resulting in accident. For details see Rear height control air suspension on page 158 in Section 16.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail- er weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, build- ing supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

For weight carrying hitch

Also for weight distributing hitch

Trailer towing

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

267

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) must never exceed the following for vehicle with equipped. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

According to the hitch receiver type, the maximum gross trailer weight and hitch that can be used differs. Refer to the above illustra- tions to confirm the hitch receiver type for your vehicle.

For weight carrying hitch 2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch 1GRFE engine

Twowheel drive models 3039 kg (6700 lb.)

Fourwheel drive models 2903 kg (6400 lb.)

2UZFE engine Twowheel drive models

3311 kg (7300 lb.) Fourwheel drive models

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh- ing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyota recommends to use a weight dis- tributing hitch.

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh- ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. The combination of the gross trailer weight added to the total weight of the vehicle, occupants and vehicle cargo must never exceed a total of the following.

For weight carrying hitch 1GRFE engine

4354 kg (9600 lb.) 2UZFE engine

4422 kg (9750 lb.) Also for weight distributing hitch

1GRFE engine 5034 kg (11100 lb.)

2UZFE engine 5443 kg (12000 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight of the trailer, the vehicle, or the ve- hicle and trailer combination, can cause an accident resulting in seri- ous personal injuries.

Trailer hitch assemblies have differ- ent weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capa- ble of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maxi- mum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating speci- fied for the trailerhitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in seri- ous personal injuries.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

268

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross vehi- cle weight is the sum of weights of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas- sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. It also includes the weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.

The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the front and rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight 100 = 10%

The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 10% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum load of the following.

For weight carrying hitch 227 kg (500 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch 1GRFE engine

Twowheel drive models 303 kg (670 lb.)

Fourwheel drive models 290 kg (640 lb.)

2UZFE engine Twowheel drive models

331 kg (730 lb.) Fourwheel drive models

317 kg (700 lb.)

Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

269

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

HITCHES

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you should consult with your Toyota dealer.

Use only a hitch recommended by the hitch manufacturer and the one which conforms to the total trailer weight re- quirement.

According to the hitch receiver type, the maximum gross trailer weight and hitch that can be used differs. Refer to the above illustrations to confirm the hitch receiver type for your vehicle.

If you wish to install an aftermarket hitch, the hitch must be bolted securely to the vehicle frame and installed ac- cording to the hitch manufactures in- structions.

The hitch ball and king pin should have a light coat of grease.

Toyota recommends the ball mount as- sembly be removed when not towing to prevent injury and to prevent damage in the event of a rear end collision. After removing the ball mount assem- bly, install the grommet to the hitch to prevent entry of dirt and mud.

NOTICE

Do not install weight distributing hitch to weight carrying hitch re- ceiver because it will be damaged your vehicle.

Do not use axlemounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. Also, never install a hitch which may interfere with the normal function of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so equipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating 2 Ball diameter 3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

270

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter- mine the correct trailer ball for your ap- plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size for the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size. The sizes you will most likely find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

III and IV 2 5/16 in.

II 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to match or exceed the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. The trailer ball load rating should be printed on the top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the threaded ball shank must protrude be- yond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer ball shank must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Only use a ball mount attachment specified for the Toyota 4runner.

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball 3 Ball mount attachment

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap- plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applica- ble federal and state/provincial regu- lations.

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in case it becomes dam- aged or separated. For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or trailer manufacturers recommenda- tions.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

271

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

If the total trailer weight exceeds 453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are required.

Never tap into your vehicles hy- draulic system as it would lower its braking effectiveness.

Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering over into another lane.

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING BRAKE CONTROLLER

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the towing brake controller as shown. Link the connector to the tow- ing brake controller via the sub wire har- ness stored in the glove box. The detailed explanation of the sub wire harness circuit is packed together with the sub wire har- ness.

Be sure to position the towing brake con- troller where it does not prevent the driver from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har- ness be stored in the glove box when it is not in use.

TIRES

Ensure that your vehicles tires are properly inflated. See page 332 in Sec- tion 72 and page 356 in Section 8 for instructions.

The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure recommended by the trail- er manufacturer in respect to the total trailer weight.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

272

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER LIGHTS

Your vehicle is equipped with a wire harness stored in the rear end under body. Some models are fitted with a socket for trailer lights under the rear bumper. Use either of them to connect and operate the trailer lights. However, the trailer lights must comply with fed- eral, state/provincial and local regula- tions. See your local recreational ve- hicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicles electrical system and cause a malfunction of your lights.

The towing connector can be also con- nected to the trailer brake and trailer sub battery.

BREAKIN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train com- ponent (engine, transmission, differen- tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. For this informa- tion, please refer to the scheduled maintenance information in the Sched- uled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen- sion in the LO (low) mode. Turn the ignition switch off or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn on the rear height control air sus- pension. Select the N (normal) mode with the height select switch.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

273

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models with rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen- sion in the LO (low) mode. (Make sure the vehicle height is in the LO (low) mode by pushing the height se- lect switch on the side.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air sus- pension.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 100 mm (4 in.).

4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn on the rear height control air sus- pension.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is lowered by the automatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch higher and repeat steps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the LO (low) mode where the hitch does not touch anything in the N (normal) mode.

8. Put the rear height control air suspen- sion in the N (normal) mode.

PRETOWING SAFETY CHECK

Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an abnormal noseup or nosedown condition, and check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes.

Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it cannot shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors con- form to any applicable federal, state/ provincial or local regulations. If not, install the rear view mirrors required for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently than when not tow- ing. The three main causes of vehicle trailer accidents are driver error, exces- sive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing:

Before starting out, check operation of the lights and all vehicletrailer connec- tions. After driving a short distance, stop and recheck the lights and con- nections. Before actually towing a trail- er, practice turning, stopping and back- ing with a trailer in an area away from traffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This pro- cedure is generally opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing to reduce the risk of an acci- dent.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

274

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Because stopping distance may be in- creased, vehicletovehicle distance should be increased when towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the ve- hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera- tion.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn to avoid the necessity of sudden braking.

Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than normal turning radius with your vehicle.

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- versely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to the rear from time to time to pre- pare yourself for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but gradually. Never increase speed. Steer straight ahead. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

Be careful when passing other ve- hicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room befo- re changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking effi- ciency, do not put the transmission in D.

Because of the added load of the trail- er, your vehicles engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 30C [85F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull off the road and stop in a safe spot. Refer to If your vehicle overheats on page 282 in Section 4.

Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put the transmission in P. Avoid park- ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un- der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into P and turn off the engine.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

275

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When restarting out after parking on a slope:

1. With the transmission in P position, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. Because insta- bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle trailer combination usually in- creases as the speed increases, ex- ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.

Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden down- shifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking effi- ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easyjust take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the cor- rect pressure. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel. See page 332 in Section 72 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warmup idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin drivingbut gently. Remember, howev- er, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.

Put the selector lever into the D when engine braking is not required.

5speed automatic transmissionDriv- ing with the selector lever in 4 will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see Automatic transmission (5speed) on page 129 in Section 16.)

4speed automatic transmissionDriv- ing with the selector lever in 3 will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see Automatic transmission (4speed) on page 134 in Section 16.)

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

276

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high gear as quickly as possible.

Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.

Avoid engine lugging or overrev- ving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are travelling.

Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down. Stopandgo driving wastes fuel.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis- tance from other vehicles to avoid sud- den braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on high- ways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel con- sumption.

Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corro- sion.

Keep your vehicle tunedup and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp- er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and con- tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance informa- tion, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manu- al Supplement.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function with- out the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is run- ning.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

277

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY In case of an emergency If your vehicle will not start 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase the engine speed 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 298. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 299. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

278

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting pro- cedure given in How to start the engine on page 260 in Section 3 and that you have sufficient fuel. Also, check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobiliser system. Call your Toyota dealer. (See Keys on page 10 in Section 12.)

If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly

1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump start- ing. See (c) Jump starting on page 279 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull or pushstart the ve- hicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts. Also the threeway catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC or LOCK and try starting the engine again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. See (b) Starting a flooded engine on page 278 for further instruc- tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to START with the accelerator pedal fully depressed, and hold the key at this posi- tion for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking hold function stops cranking au- tomatically, and you can try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

If your vehicle will not start (a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

279

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might re- sult from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek the help of a competent me- chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or ve- hicle.

If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water imme- diately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.

The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unneces- sary lights and accessories.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster and discharged batter- ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the batteries. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for a few minutes. During jump starting run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

280

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Positive terminal (+ mark)

Jumper cable Positive terminal (+ mark)

Booster battery

Discharged battery

4. Make the cable connections in the or- der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive (red) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the booster battery.

Discharged battery

Booster battery

Negative terminal ( mark)

Jumper cable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative (black) jumper cable to the negative () terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) jumper cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic point of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

The recommended connecting points are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 1GRFE engine

Connecting point for 2UZFE engine

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

281

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Do not connect the cable to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch any- thing except the correct battery termi- nals or the ground.

5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover clothsthey may now contain sulfuric acid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to ACC or LOCK, and try starting the engine again.

If the engine will not start, see If your vehicle will not start on page 278 in this Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow- er assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- er, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to ACC or LOCK position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro- neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls while driving

If you cannot increase the engine speed

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

282

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you ex- perience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. You should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve- hicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in P and apply the parking brake. Turn off the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the radiator or reservoir, stop the engine. Wait until the steam subsides before opening the hood. If there is no coolant boiling over or steam, leave the engine running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is a sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle. However, note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the coolant is leaking, stop the engine im- mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as- sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and there are no obvious leaks, you may help the engine cool down more quickly by running it at about 1500 rpm for a few minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add coolant to the reservoir while the engine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, again check the coolant level in the reservoir. If neces- sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri- ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the system. You should have it checked as soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

283

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in P.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thor- oughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:

Follow jacking instructions.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in P. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if neces- sary.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the ve- hicle with jack improperly posi- tioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.

Do not raise the vehicle with some- one in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or un- derneath the jack.

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a de- flated tire. Driving even a short dis- tance can damage a tire and wheel beyond repair.

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When jacking up or installing the tire chains, be sure to turn off the rear height control and stop the engine. Otherwise, the ve- hicle height may change in the au- tomatic leveling function, resulting in accident.

If you have a flat tire

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

284

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Get the required tools and spare tire.

1. Tool bag 2. Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack, each of the tools and their stor- age locations.

When storing the tool bag, make sure it is securely held by the tightening strap.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1 until the jack is free. To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire under the lug- gage compartment:

1. Put a jack handle and jack handle ex- tensions together as shown in the il- lustration.

1. Jack handle extensions 2. Jack handle

Required tools and spare tire

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

285

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When connecting a jack handle extension with jack handle end, use a Phillipshead screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the bolts on the joints as shown in the il- lustration.

When connecting the jack handle with ex- tension, tighten the bolt on the joint se- curely.

When you tighten the bolt, make sure that it fits into the depression on the joint.

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise, the extension may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle exten- sion into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise with the handle.

3. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding brack- et.

When storing the spare tire, put it in place with the outer side of the wheel facing up. Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden brak- ing.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

286

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the wheel nut wrench as shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected person- al injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais- ing the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yetjust unscrew them about onehalf turn.

Blocking the wheel Removing wheel ornament Loosening wheel nuts

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

287

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cau- se a serious accident.

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.

JACK POINTS:

FrontUnder the frame side rail RearUnder the rear axle housing

Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration.

1. Jack handle end 2. Jack handle extensions 3. Jack handle

Positioning the jack

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

288

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When connecting a jack handle extension with jack handle end, use a Phillipshead screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the bolts on the joints as shown in the il- lustration.

When connecting the jack handle with ex- tension, tighten the bolt on the joint se- curely.

When you tighten the bolt, make sure that it fits into the depression on the joint.

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise, the extension may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.

Front of vehicle

6. After making sure that no one is in the vehicle, as the jack touches the vehicle and begins to fit, double check that it is properly positioned.

Rear side only When positioning the jack under the rear axle housing, make sure the groove on the top of the jack fits with the rear axle housing.

Raising your vehicle

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

289

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

7. Raise the vehicle high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with the handle.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

8. Remove the wheel nuts and change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any cor- rosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metaltometal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.

Changing wheels

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

290

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in- ward) and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press back on the tire back and see if you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to over- tightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cau- se a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.

10. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension counter- clockwise with handle to lower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.

Reinstalling wheel nuts Lowering your vehicle

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

291

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.

Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 110 Nm (11.5 kgfm, 83 ftlbf), as soon as pos- sible after changing wheels. Other- wise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. 11. Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Put the wheel ornament into position and then tap it firmly with the side or heel of your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the orna- ment to avoid unexpected personal injury.

12. Check the air pressure of the re- placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated on page 356 in Section 8. If the pressure is lower, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the cor- rect pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new one put on as soon as possible.

13. Restow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely.

As soon after changing wheels as pos- sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque specified on page 356 in Section 8 with a torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire.

Reinstalling wheel ornament After changing wheels

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

292

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal in- jury during a collision or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward.

Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For details, see Trac- tion control system on page 145 in Section 16.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and back- ward if people or objects are any- where near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or ob- jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent dam- age to the transmission and other parts.

Do not depress the accelerator ped- al while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is com- pletely shifted to forward or reverse gear.

Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.

If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as tow- ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

293

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

From front

From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Twowheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front

From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Fourwheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck ser- vice. In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Toyota dealer or com- mercial tow truck service, tow your ve- hicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in Emergency tow- ing on page 295 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following pre- cautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to be towed

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

294

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When your vehicle is towed, put the vehicle height in the N (normal) mode and push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed in the auto- matic leveling function, resulting in accident. For details, see Rear height control air suspension on page 158 in Section 16.

Twowheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

From rearPlace the ignition key in the ACC position.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged dur- ing towing.

Do not tow with the key removed or in the LOCK position, as the steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

Fourwheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

FULLTIME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

Use a towing dolly under the wheels not lifted by the truck.

MULTIMODE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

From front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

From rearWe recommend using a tow- ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do not use a towing dolly, place the ignition key in the ACC position, put the trans- mission in N and the multimode control switch knob in H2.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

295

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged dur- ing towing.

Do not tow with the key removed or in the LOCK position when tow- ing from the rear without a towing dolly. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

(b) Using flat bed truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

All models

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei- ther from the front or rear. This may cause body damage.

Front

Rear

Emergency towing

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

296

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck ser- vice.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be tempo- rarily towed by a cable or chain se- cured to either emergency towing eyelet under the front of the vehicle or the left emergency towing eyelet under the rear of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicles.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your vehicle may be dam- aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hardsurfaced roads for a short dis- tance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve- hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in N. The key must be in ACC (engine off) or ON (engine running).

Fourwheel drive modelsOn multimode fourwheel drive models, put the multi mode control switch knob in H2. On full time fourwheel drive models, unlock the center differential.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow- er assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

297

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.

Fasten the towing cable or chain se- curely to the eyelet.

Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.

To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when your vehicle becomes struck in mud, sand or oth- er condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power, make sure to observe the pre- cautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.

If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

The following methods are effective to get out when your vehicle is struck in mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. Use extreme cau- tion when towing vehicles. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or chain when towing.

Remove the soil and sand in the front and the back of the tires.

Place a stone or wood under the tires.

Emergency towing eyelet precautions

Tips for towing a stuck vehicle

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

298

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you cannot shift the selector lever out of P position to other positions even though the brake pedal is de- pressed, use the shift lock override but- ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK position. Make sure the parking brake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatbladed screwdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent into the hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out of P position only while push- ing the button.

4. Shift into N position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at your Toyota dealer if you can give them the key number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contact your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobi- liser system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in Keys on page 10 in Section 12.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota dealers can still open the door for you, using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window be- cause it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from the glass.

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever If you lose your keys

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

299

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Please contact your nearest Toyota dealer and you can purchase a new wireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbers of your transmitters deleted from your ve- hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft or an accident. Then, have the identification number of your new transmitter registered. At the same time, you must bring all of the remaining transmitters to have them registered again as well.

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

300

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

301

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion prevention and appearance care Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rain clearing mirrors 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

302

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Toyota, through the diligent research, de- sign and use of the most advanced technology available, helps prevent corro- sion and provides you with the finest qual- ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to you. Proper care of your Toyota can help ensure longterm corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hardtoreach areas under the vehicle.

Chipping of paint, or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live in particular areas or operate your ve- hicle under certain environmental condi- tions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals will accelerate corrosion, as will the pres- ence of salt in the air near the sea coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion es- pecially when temperatures range just above the freezing point.

Wetness or dampness to certain parts of your vehicle for an extended period of time, may cause corrosion even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.

High ambient temperatures can cause corrosion to those components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any dam- age to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of course, necessary to keep your vehicle clean by regular washing, but to prevent corrosion, the following points should be observed:

If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize cor- rosion.

High pressure water or steam is effec- tive for cleaning the vehicles underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thor- oughly when winter is over.

See Washing and waxing your Toyota on page 303 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicles paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up im- mediately to prevent corrosion from start- ing. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

303

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa- ter and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc- casionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly care- ful when transporting chemicals, cleans- ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Fullsize shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the shields if they are recommended for your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti- lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.

The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos- sible.

When driving in a coastal area

When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze

When having coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud

Handwashing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis, be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re- move any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild carwash soap, mixed according to the manufacturers instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hardlet the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high pressure car wash, for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience trouble with re- fueling or rough engine idling.

Rear height control air suspension: Do not spray a jet of highpressure water at the air suspension unit, especially the air spring, at an extremely close range. This may damage the air suspension.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic sub- stances splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with water and check if the ornament is damaged.

Washing and waxing your Toyota

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

304

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the vehicle is moving.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso- line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol- vents), which may be toxic or cause damage.

3. Rinse thoroughlydried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hardyou might scratch the paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto- matic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you wheth- er the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Toyotas finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be- fore you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weath- ered, use a carcleaning polish, fol- lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol- low the manufacturers instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the sur- face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers if your vehicle is repainted and placed in a high heat paint waxing booth. High temperatures could damage the bumpers.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

305

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and cur- tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the side airbags and curtain shield airbags from activating cor- rectly, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or un- der the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re- move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foam- ingtype vinyl cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturers instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foamtype shampoo to clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to pro- duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply waterthe best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean- ing, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying, or cuts.

Cleaning the interior

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

306

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Do not use dye or bleach on the beltsit may weaken them.

Do not use the belts until they be- come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.

When cleaning the inside of the rear quarter window, be careful not to scratch or damage the printed antenna.

Air conditioning control panel, car au- dio, instrument panel, console panel and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke- warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (sol- vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discol- oring, staining or peeling of the surface.

If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances men- tioned above.

If you use a liquid car freshener, do not apill the liquid onto the ve- hicles interior surfaces. It may con- tain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti- lated shaded area.

NOTICE

If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.

Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for clean- ing the leather as these could cause discoloring.

Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.

Mildew may develop on soiled leath- er upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean.

Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your ve- hicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

307

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.

Improper cleaning of the leather up- holstery could result in discolor- ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the cleaning of your Toyota, your local Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer them.

On some models, the outside rear view mirrors have been coated to produce a rain clearing effect. This coating causes the raindrops to spread, clear- ing the drivers rear view when it rains.

It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with water for day to day care.

The rain clearing effect is reduced in drizzle and light rain.

In the following cases, the rain clearing effect will be reduced temporarily, but will gradually recover.

After wiping dirt off the mirrors

When the mirrors fog up

After waxing your vehicle in an auto- matic car wash

After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in underground parking lots, etc. where there is no direct sun- light.

If you would like to restore the rain clear- ing effect to its normal level immediately in the above cases, wash the mirrors with neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

NOTICE

To maintain the rain clearing ability, and prevent the mirrors from being scratched, observe the following pre- cautions.

Do not use any glass cleaners that contain compounds.

If ice should jam the mirror, do not scrape the mirror. Use a spray de icer to free the mirror.

Wash off any wax stuck to the mir- rors with neutral detergent and rinse thoroughly as any wax on the surface of the mirrors can cause the rain clearing effect to be lost.

Do not use any water repellents as they can destroy the rain clearing effect. If any repellent gets stuck on the surface of the mirrors, wash it off with neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

Rain clearing mirrors

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

308

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

309

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE Vehicle maintenance and care Maintenance requirements 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 314. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Sched- uled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

SECTION 6

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

310

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with long- er service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular mainte- nance, as well as daytoday care, is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, and troublefree, safe, and eco- nomical drivings.

It is the owners responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emis- sion control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be per- formed. See Owners Warranty Informa- tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supple- ment for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day today care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owners responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or a qualified technician, or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement are those required to be serviced at regular inter- vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule, read the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

It is recommended that any replacement parts used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use nonToyota supplied parts for replacement pur- poses without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effec- tiveness of the emission control sys- tems.

You may also elect to have mainte- nance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair es- tablishment or individual without invali- dating this warranty. See Owners War- ranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement for complete war- ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are welltrained spe- cialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and indealership training programs. They learn to work on Toyotas before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance require- ments on your vehiclereliably and eco- nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been per- formed for warranty coverage. If any prob- lems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Toyota.

What about doityourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little mechani- cal ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to per- form them are presented on page 315 in Section 7.

Maintenance requirements

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

311

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you are a skilled doityourself mechan- ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom- mended. Please be aware that doityour- self maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See Owners Warranty Informa- tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supple- ment for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed as fre- quently as specified. In addition to check- ing the items listed, if you notice any unusual noise, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali- fied service shop immediately. It is recom- mended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your dealer or the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade- quate ventilation if you run the en- gine.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Tire pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month. See page 332 in Section 72 for additional information.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See page 333 in Sec- tion 72 for additional information. When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check the nuts for loose- ness. Tighten them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the mainte- nance schedule. (For scheduled mainte- nance information, please refer to the sep- arate Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.) See page 334 in Section 72 for additional informa- tion.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa- ter or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back door operate smoothly and all latches lock se- curely. Make sure the engine hood sec- ondary latch secures the hood from open- ing when the primary latch is released.

General maintenance

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

312

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op- erate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraint move up and down smooth- ly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. For foldingdown rear seatbacks and swingup rear seat cush- ions, check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and that the pedal has the proper clearance. Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.

Automatic transmission Park mecha- nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in P position and all brakes released.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 343 in Section 73 for additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between the F and L lines on the seethrough reservoir when the engine is cold. See page 326 in Section 72 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 328 in Section 72 for additional information.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

313

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica- tor color. See page 340 in Section 73 for additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 328 in Section 72 for addition- al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 324 in Section 72 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in the HOT or COLD range depending on the fluid temperature. See page 329 in Section 72 for addition- al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immedi- ately. (See Engine exhaust cautions on page 247 in Section 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in perfor- mance, sounds, and visual tipoffs that indicate service is needed. Some impor- tant clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A leak under the vehicle (however, wa- ter dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked im- mediately.)

Flatlooking tire; excessive tire squeal when cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension movement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy feeling brake pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve- hicle unchecked. It could result in se- rious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury.

Does your vehicle need repairing?

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

314

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Some states have vehicle emission in- spection programs which include OBD (OnBoard Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving. However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary mal- function such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test even the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for retesting.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

315

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DOITYOURSELF MAINTENANCE Introduction Engine compartment overview 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doityourself service precautions 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 1

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

316

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Windshield and back window washer fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

Engine compartment overview 1GRFE engine

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

317

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Windshield and back window washer fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

2UZFE engine

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

318

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Spare fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in- complete servicing may result in operating problems.

Performing doityourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate Toyota Warranty statement for details and suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in Section 6, there are still a number of items that must be done by a qualified technician with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do ityourself maintenance, see Parts and tools on page 320 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work- ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to ob- serve:

Fuse locations Doityourself service precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

319

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belts. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right after driving, the engine compartmentthe engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, power steering fluid reservoir and spark plug boots, etc.will be hot. So be care- ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids and spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not remove the radiator cap or loosen the drain plugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- low open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Al- ways use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.

Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as in- flammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To re- move used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.

Dispose of used oil and filter only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and fil- ter in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal.

Be extremely cautious when work- ing on the battery. It contains poi- sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or volt- ages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.

Add only demineralized or distilled water to fill the radiator. And if you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.

Do not allow dirt or anything else to fall through the spark plug holes.

Use only spark plugs of the speci- fied type. Using other types will cause engine damage, loss of per- formance or radio noise.

Do not reuse iridiumtipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Do not overfill automatic transmis- sion fluid, or the transmission could be damaged.

Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

320

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame.

When closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not for- gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform doityourself mainte- nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de- signed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equiva- lent

See page 325 in Section 72 for de- tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant or equivalent

See page 326 in Section 72 for de- tails about coolant type selection.

Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

Warm water

Baking soda

Grease

Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Parts and tools

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

321

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Fuse with same amperage rating as original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

Water

Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

Tools:

Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original (See charts in Re- placing light bulbs on page 344 in Section 73.)

Tools:

Screwdriver

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

322

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

323

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DOITYOURSELF MAINTENANCE Engine and Chassis Checking the engine oil level 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 2

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

324

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

1GRFE engine

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

2UZFE engine

With the engine at operating tempera- ture and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level ground. After turn- ing off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstickpush it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex- haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop the engine oil on the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil in small quantities at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill between the low level and the full level on the dipstick is indicated below for ref- erence.

When the level reaches within the correct range, install the filler cap handtight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.): 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

325

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is filled in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: API grade SL EnergyConserving or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W30 is not available, SAE 10W30 may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W30 at the next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

326

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any- where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API (American Petroleum Insti- tute) designations such as SL. The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscos- ity grade such as SAE 5W30. Energy Conserving shown in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuelsaving ca- pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan- dardization and Approval Committee) Certi- fication Mark is displayed on the front of the container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor- mance for your engine, Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details about Toyota Genuine Motor Oil.

Look at the seethrough coolant reser- voir when the engine is cold. The cool- ant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add ethyleneglycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components.

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the L line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the F line.

Always use ethyleneglycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of alumi- num components. See information in the next column.

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.

Checking the engine coolant level

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

327

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the en- gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system. Your coolant must contain ethyleneglycol type coolant for proper corrosion protection of your engine that contains aluminum components.

We have used Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant in your Toyota vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing and subsequent damage to the engine, this type of coolant will also prevent corrosion. Further supplemental inhibitors or additives are neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for information on freeze protection. Follow the manufac- turers directions for how much to mix with plain water (preferably demineralized water or distilled water). The total capacity of the cooling system is given on page 353 in Section 8.

We recommend a 50% solution for your Toyota, to provide protection down to about 35C (31F). When it is extreme- ly cold, to provide protection down to about 50C (58F), a 60% solution is recommended. Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.

The engine cooling system is integral to maximizing performance of your Toyota vehicle. In line with this, it is strongly recommended that you use Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant for protecting the system, as it is an ethyleneglycol based premium antifreeze coolant with excellent corrosion protection properties that has been specifically formulated for use in Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details about Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

328

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condi- tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care- ful not to touch the radiator or con- denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at the seethrough reservoir. The level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical prob- lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the brake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line.

If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your eyes, go to the doctor.

Checking the radiator and condenser Checking brake fluid

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

329

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.

If cold O.K. If hot O.K.

If cold add

If hot add

Close Open

Check the fluid level through the reser- voir. If necessary, add automatic trans- mission fluid DEXRONII or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot (60C80C or 140F175F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C30C or 50F85F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the COLD range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the HOT range. If the level is at the low side of either range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun- terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser- voir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer- ing could be damaged.

Checking power steering fluid

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

330

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af- ter long use. The filter may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air condi- tioning and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency, or if the windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance sched- ule. (For scheduled maintenance informa- tion, please refer to the Scheduled Main- tenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.)

1. Open the glove box. Remove the screw with a Phillipshead screw- driver and slide the hook as shown.

2. Push each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.

Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

331

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

3. Remove the filter case by holding both sides.

4. Remove the filter from the filter case.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is the just moderately dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing compressed air from the reverse surface. Do not wash or oil the filter.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When setting the filter to the filter case, ensure that the flat side of the filter is down and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the UP mark is pointing up and install it in the vehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop- erly in position. The use of air condi- tioning with the air filter removed may cause deteriorated dustproof per- formance and then affect air condi- tioning performance.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

332

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Keep your tire pressures at the proper level.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tire size and the cargo load are given on pages 352 and 356 in Section 8. They are also on the tire pressure label as shown.

You should check the tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And dont forget the spare!

Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Keep your tire pressure properly in- flated. Otherwise, the following condi- tions may occur and cause an acci- dent resulting in death or serious in- juries.

Low tire pressure (underinflation)

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts from over- heated tire

Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire sepa- ration

High tire pressure (overinflation)

Poor handling

Excessive wear at the center of the tire tread

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

Checking tire pressure

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

333

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The following instructions for checking tire pressure should be observed:

The pressure should be checked only when the tires are cold. If your ve- hicle has been packed for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire pressure reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of a tire can be mis- leading. Besides, tire pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. The passenger and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced.

Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible.

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire tread for the tread wear indicators. If the indicators show, re- place the tires.

The tires on your Toyota have builtin tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be re- placed. The lower the tread, the higher the risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be prop- erly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driv- ing even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified techni- cian even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used.

This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for future use.

Checking and replacing tires

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

334

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater load capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, on four wheel drive models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedome- ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not mix radial, bias belted, or biasply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires other than the manufacturers recommended size, as this may cause dangerous han- dling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Fourwheel drive models: Do not use tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread pat- terns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or at least both front or rear tires be re- placed as a set.

See If you have a flat tire on page 283 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels can get out of balance with regular use and should therefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the air valve should also be replaced with a new one.

To equalize the wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends that you rotate your tires according to the main- tenance schedule. (For scheduled main- tenance information, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.) Howev- er, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface condi- tions.

See If you have a flat tire on page 283 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

Rotating tires

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

335

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu- ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im- proper wheel alignment, outofbalance wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, on fourwheel drive models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men- tioned above. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturers recommended si- ze, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Fourwheel drive models: Do not use snow tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause danger- ous handling characteristics result- ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when replacing.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires and chains

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

336

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road, so always check the local regulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.51.0 km (1/41/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care- fully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be scratched by the chain band, so remove the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturers recom- mended speed limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel braking, as use of chains may ad- versely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that the wheels are re- placed by ones with the same load ca- pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bear- ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom- eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear- ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

337

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Replacement with used wheels is not rec- ommended as they may have been sub- jected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use wheels other than the manufacturers recommended size, as this may cause dangerous han- dling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Fourwheel drive models: Do not use wheels of different brands, sizes and types, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000 miles).

If you have rotated, repaired or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels.

When balancing your wheels, use only Toyota balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

338

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

339

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DOITYOURSELF MAINTENANCE Electrical components Checking battery condition 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 3

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

340

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the bat- tery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

Keep children away from the bat- tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately and get immediate medical attention. If possible, con- tinue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medi- cal office.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contact area. If you feel pain or burning, get medi- cal attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediate- ly take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if nec- essary.

If you accidentally swallow electro- lyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magne- sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emer- gency help.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Terminals

Holddown clamp

Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or loose terminal connections, cracks, or loose holddown clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and bak- ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi- nals with grease to prevent further cor- rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose, tighten their clamp nutsbut do not overtighten.

c. Tighten the holddown clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case.

Checking battery condition Precautions Checking battery exterior

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

341

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

NOTICE

Be sure the engine and all accesso- ries are off before performing main- tenance.

When checking the battery, remove the ground cable from the negative terminal ( mark) first and rein- stall it last.

Be careful not to cause a short cir- cuit with tools.

Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the power window, power back win- dow and moon roof may not operate auto- matically and the jam protection function will not function correctly, and does not open the back door after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the power window, power back window, back door and moon roof. To normalize them, see Power windows on page 23, Power back window on page 26, Back door on page 29 and Electric moon roof on page 35 in Section 12.

Type A

Type B

Green Dark Clear or light yellow

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi- cator color.

Indicator color Condition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary. Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Clear or light

yellow Red

Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro- ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re- charger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un- confined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventila- tion.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may ex- plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

342

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work, check the fuses. If any of the fuses are blown, they must be replaced.

See Fuse locations on page 318 in Sec- tion 71 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative component off. Pull a suspected fuse straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse. See page 356 in Section 8 of this manual for the functions controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using the pullout tool. The location of the pull out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has blown, try replacing the suspected fuse with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat- ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the PWR OUTLET or HEATER NO.2 fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper- age, use one that is lower, but as close as possible to the rating. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your ve- hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

343

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical sys- tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am- perage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause ex- tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work, the wash- er tank may be empty. Check the wash- er fluid level on the level gauge. If the washer fluid level is below LOW or only slightly above the LOW level, add washer fluid.

For vehicles sold in Canada If any washer does not work or low windshield washer fluid level warning light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where tempera- tures range below freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Toyota dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturers directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may dam- age your vehicles paint.

Adding washer fluid

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

344

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

The following illustrations show how to gain access to the bulbs. When replacing a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and light switch are off. Use bulbs with the wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain. However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your Toyota dealer.

Replacing light bulbs

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

345

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: HB4 halogen bulbs C: Wedge base bulbs (clear) D: Wedge base bulbs (amber) E: Double end bulbs

9005

TypeWBulb No.Light bulbs

Headlights (high beam)

Headlights (high and low beams)

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights (without daytime running light system)

Front turn signal lights (with daytime running light system)

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Backup lights

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Interior light

Personal lights

Vanity lights

Door courtesy lights

Glove box light

Luggage compartment light

Running board lights

9006

9006

168

921

921

168

4157NAK

60

51

51

5

21

27/8

21

21/5

16

5

16

8

5

3

3.8

1.2

8

3.8

A

B

B

D

D

D

D

C

C

C

C

E

C

E

C

C

E

C

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

346

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Low beam (outside)

High beam (inside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress- ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector into the mounting hole and turn them clockwise to the front of the vehicle.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec- essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

Headlights

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

347

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress- ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector into the mounting hole and turn them clockwise to the front of the vehicle.

Front fog lights

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

348

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Use a flatbladed screwdriver which is wrapped with a cloth.

Parking and front side marker lights Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal, stop/tail, rear side marker and backup lights

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

349

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

a: Rear turn signal light b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light c: Backup light

Use a Phillipshead screwdriver.

Clips

Disconnect the clips by using a flat bladed screwdriver which is wrapped with a cloth.

License plate lights High mounted stoplight

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

350

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

351

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

SPECIFICATIONS Specifications Dimensions and cargo load 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

352

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Model: 1GRFE and 2UZFE

Type: 1GRFE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline 2UZFE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.): 1GRFE engine

94.0 95.0 (3.70 3.74) 2UZFE engine

94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.): 1GRFE engine 3956 (241.4) 2UZFE engine 4664 (284.6)

Dimensions and cargo load

Overall width mm (in.)

2790 (109.8)

Overall height1 mm (in.)

1575 (62.0)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0)

Rear tread mm (in.)

66 (145)

1: Unladen vehicle 2: With twowheel drive models 3: With fourwheel drive models 4: With roof rails 5: With rear spoiler 6: With rear height control air suspension

Overall length mm (in.)

Cargo load kg (lb.)

4800 (189.0)

1875 (73.8)

1820 (71.7)2 or 3, 4

1765 (69.5)2, 5

1760 (69.3)3, 5

1755 (69.1)2

1750 (68.9)3

1810 (71.3)2 or 3, 4, 6

1750 (68.9)2 or 3, 5, 6

1740 (68.5)2 or 3, 6

Engine

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

353

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Fuel type: Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc- tane Number 96) or higher is recom- mended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.): 87 (23.0, 19.1)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

1GRFE engine Intake 0.150.25 (0.0060.010) Exhaust 0.290.39 (0.0110.015)

2UZFE engine Intake 0.150.25 (0.0060.010) Exhaust 0.250.35 (0.0100.014)

Spark plug type:

1GRFE engine DENSO K20HRU11 NGK LFR6C11

2UZFE engine DENSO SK20R11 NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.): 1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1GRFE engine With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6) Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

2UZFE engine With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5) Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is filled in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: API grade SL EnergyConserving or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details.

Fuel Service specifications

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

354

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): 1GRFE engine 9.8 (10.4, 8.6) 2UZFE engine 12.3 (13,0, 10.8)

Coolant type:

Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant is filled in your Toyota vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant or equivalent.

With ethyleneglycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage at 20C (68F): 12.612.8 V Fully charged 12.212.4 V Half charged 11.812.0 V Discharged

: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af- ter the key is removed with all the lights turned off

Charging rates: 5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1GRFE engine Up to 2.0 (2.1, 1.8)

2UZFE engine Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type: Toyota Genuine ATF Type TIV

Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only Toyota Genuine ATF Type TIV (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring optimum transmission perfor- mance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Toyota Genuine ATF Type TIV may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your trans- mission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic trans- mission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Oil type: Hypoid gear oil API GL5

Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 75W90

DIFFERENTIAL (1GRFE engine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Twowheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Fourwheel drive models Front 1.5 (1.6, 1.3) Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type: Hypoid gear oil API GL5

Recommended oil viscosity: Front

SAE 75W90

Rear Above 18C (0F)

SAE 90 Below 18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W90

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

355

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

DIFFERENTIAL (2UZFE engine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Twowheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Fourwheel drive models Front 1.4 (1.5, 1.2) Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type: Hypoid gear oil API GL5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Above 18C (0F) SAE 90

Below 18C (0F) SAE 80W or 80W90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

Spiders and slide yokes Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) with the engine running, mm (in.):

55 (2.2)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 16 (0.040.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):

57 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

356

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high mounted stoplight, shift lock control system, antilock brake system, trac- tion control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), vehicle sta- bility control system, rear height control air suspension, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system, trailer brake controller, trailer lights (tail lights)

Tires

Tire size

Tire pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Front Rear

P265/70R16 111S

P265/65R17 110S

220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)

220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)

Wheel size

16 7J1

16 7JJ2

17 7 1/2JJ

Tire size, pressure and wheel size:

1: Vehicles with steel wheels 2: Vehicles with aluminum wheels

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see Checking tire pressure through Aluminum wheel precau- tions, pages 332 through 337 in Section 72.

Wheel nut torque, Nm (kgfm, ftlbf): 110 (11.5, 83)

Fuses

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

357

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Instrument panel

4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter

5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

6. OBD 7.5 A: Onboard diagnosis sys- tem

7. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Righthand headlight (low beam)

8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Lefthand head- light (low beam)

9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Righthand head- light (high beam)

10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Lefthand head- light (high beam)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system

12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioning system

13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height con- trol air suspension

14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters

15. DEFOG 30 A: Rear window defogger, multiport fuel injection system/sequen- tial multiport fuel injection system

16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear view mirror heater

17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal lights, wireless remote control system, door courtesy lights, rear seat audio system, gauge and meter, vanity lights, instrument panel lights, running board lights, multiplex communication system

18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, nav- igation system

19. ECUB 10 A: Antilock brake system, navigation system, traction control sys- tem (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), vehicle stability control system, air conditioning system, multi- plex communication system, theft deter- rent system

20. ALTS 7.5 A: Charging system

21. HORN 10 A: Horns

22. A/F HEATER 15 A: No circuit

23. TRNHAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights, emergency flashers

24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system

25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys- tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system

26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system

29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys- tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system, antilock brake system, trac- tion control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), vehicle sta- bility control system, stop light, meter and gauge

30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system

31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injec- tion system/sequential multiport fuel in- jection system

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

358

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

33. FR WIPWSH 30 A: Windshield wipers and washer

34. 4WD 20 A: Fourwheel drive control system

35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Drivers power seat

36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passengers power seat

37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

38. RR WSH 15 A: Rear window washer, multiplex communication system

39. ECUIG 10 A: Shift lock control sys- tem, power windows, antilock brake system, traction control system (two wheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive mod- els), vehicle stability control system, electric moon roof, multiplex commu- nication system, theft deterrent system, rear height control air suspension

40. IG1 15 A: Antilock brake system, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system, air condi- tioning system, charging system, rear window defogger, backup lights, turn signal lights, emergency flashers, seat heaters, AC inverter, instrument panel light control, auto antiglare inside rear view mirror, SRS airbag system

41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit

42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent sys- tem

43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate lights, parking lights, instrument panel light control, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system, instrument panel lights, meter and gauge, grove box light

44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rear view mirrors, audio system, navigation system, rear seat audio system, shift lock control system, instrument panel lights

45. CIG 10 A: No circuit

Fuses (type B)

46. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system

47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control air suspension

48. AM1 50 A: All components in ACC, CIG, IG1, ECUIG, FR WIP WSH, RR WIP, RRWSH, 4WD, and STA fuses

49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con- troller

50. J/B 50 A: All components in PWR OUTLET, D P/SEAT, P P/SEAT, POWER, TAIL and SECU/HORN fuses

51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery

52. TOWING 40 A: Trailer lights (tail lights)

53. ABS MTR 40 A: Antilock brake sys- tem, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system

54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, IGN, GAUGE, STA NO.2 and SRS fuses

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

359

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

55. ABS SOL 50 A: Antilock brake sys- tem, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system

56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electric moon roof

Fuses (type C)

57. ALT 140 A: All components in AM2, ALTS, DR/LCK, TRNHAZ, HORN, RADIO NO.2, EFI, TOWING, ABS MTR, ABS SOL and ETCS fuses

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

360

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

361

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and uniform tire quality grading Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

362

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 18003314331).

If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve- hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei- ther call the Auto Safety Hotline tollfree at 18004249393 (or 3660123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hot- line.

This information has been prepared in ac- cordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- tration of the U.S. Department of Trans- portation. It provides the purchasers and/ or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality gradesAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners Uniform tire quality grading

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

363

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may de- part significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac- tices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, and they represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on spe- cified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissi- pate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to de- generate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a lev- el of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor- mance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is prop- erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces- sive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combina- tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

364

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Seat Belt Warning

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

Comfortable

Easy to use

Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Repair Manual Information

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running order is to maintain it properly from

the moment you drive it off the showroom

floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is

packed with literally everything you need to

know to perform your own maintenance in virtually every area of your new vehicle.

03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. 03 Prod. (OM35820U)

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for 4RUNNER, written in

English, may be purchased as applicable from

any Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2003 4RUNNER Repair Manual Pub. No.: RM1001U1

RM1001U2

RM1034U

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tuneup

Periodic maintenance and tuneup helps to pre- vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 4Runner Toyota works, you can view and download the Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Toyota 4Runner as well as other Toyota manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Toyota 4Runner. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Toyota 4Runner 2003 SUV Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.